UC-NRLF 


^..iMTjasit  jir  3«8Pwrj«OMPK 


^B    3Db    IbM 


im  mi  m  »« 


A  Text-Book  on  Commercial  Law. 

A   Manual    of    tlie  Fundamental    Principles    Governing-    Business 

Transactions.  For    the    Use  of    Commercial   Colleges,    High 

Sch<  iinsellor-at- 
La\^ 


prin 

The« 
and  com] 
oommerc 
CoUeg-es. 

The  plai 

Afte: 
and  of  CO 
Tart  I.  tr 
sions,  tre 
tourth  di 
R-eneral  i 
kinds  of  ; 
of  Goods, 
the  princ 

The( 
ful,  and 
those  pui 
others:—' 
impresses 
rules  at 
papers  m 
cross-ref( 

The  I 
country. 


From 

I  find 

account  of 

of  commei 

ou  the  sul 

Send  to  m 


Please  for 

The  B.  i 

You  may  6 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

£DDCATIOK  L12HU 

GIFT  OF 

The  Estate  of 
Miss  Bertha  Newell 


iandsomely 


t  simply, 
psactlons  of 
pommerelal 


d  State  law, 
b  two  parts. 
i  three  divi- 
Bhlp,  with  a 
I  few  others 
prominent 
fbjects.  Sale 
pplication  of 

btically  use- 
I  subservfhfif 
ares  amongr 
[go.  subject; 
of  leading 
of  business 
amples  and 

lieges  of  the 


<{nta,  Oa. 
sxt  book,  on 
ce  on  points 
;onci?e  work 


Please  ship  ua  lou  V/iarK  a  commercial  i^aw. 
Please  send 


^.  14,  1883. 
>ER,  Prop'r. 
g.  1,  1882. 

d,  Principal. 
V.  25,  1882. 

f,  Principals. 

[le.  8.  1882. 
iiuvvji  &  I'UWJJJllS,  Prop'rp. 


Lawrkncb  Business  College,  Lawrence,  Kan.,  Au£j.  25, 1882. 
us  100  copies  of  Clark's  Commercial  Law. 

BOOR  &  McILRAVY,  Prop'rs. 
New  Jebbet  Business  College,  Newark,  N.  J.,  Sept.  22,  1882. 
Please  send  us,  by  express,  60  Clark's  Commercial  Law. 

MILLER  &  DRAKE,  Principals. 


Clark  &  Maynard,  Publishers,  New  York. 


A  Commercial  Arithmetic; 

DESIGNED  FOR 

Acaiemles,  Higli  Sclools,  Gonntiiig  Roonis  and  Business  Colleges. 

By  JAMES    B.    THOMSON,   LL.D., 
AurnoR  op  a  Mathematical  Series. 

This  work  has  been  prepared  with  sole  reference  to  a  business 
education  in  its  higher  departments.  To  this  end,  subjects  fully  ex- 
plained in  the  author's  elementary  Arithmetic  or  an  equivalent,  and 
with  which  the  student  is  supposed  to  be  familiar,  are  omitted. 

In  the  fundamental  rules,  many  labor-saving  methods  of  operation 
are  given  under  the  appropriate  name  "  Counting  Room  Methods." 

Business  forms  in  great  variety  are  intrcxluced,  and  their  nature 
and  usesexi>lained.  The  manner  of  keeping  Book  Accounts,  Averaging 
Payments,  Partnership  Settlements,  etc.,  is  fully  explained  and  illus- 
trated. 

The  chapter  on  the  Metric  System  of  Weights  and  Measures  in- 
cludes all  the  latest  recommendations  of  the  Metric  Bureau. 

The  facts  and  methods,  procured  from  reliable  persons  who  are 
thoroughly  versed  in  their  several  departments,  are  autJientic  business 
facts,  and  in  accordance  with  the  present  usage. 

Special  care  has  been  devoted  to  the  chapter  on  Stocks  and  Bonds, 
and  to  Stock  Exchange  l)usiuess,  which  is  a  full  and  rf^liable  summary 
of  affairs  as  now  conducted  on  the  New  York  Stock  Exchange.  The 
examples  embrace  true  specimens  of  daily  operations  in  Wall  Street. 

The  chapters  on  Banking,  Clearing  Houses,  and  Custom  House 
business  have  also  been  subjected  to  the  most  careful  scrutiny,  as  also 
Life  Insurance,  Annuities,  Sinking  Funds,  etc. 

The  exam])les  are  all  new,  and  have  been  selected  with  a  special 
view  to  their  practical  application  to  business,  and  not  as  a  trial  of  the 
mathematical  skill  of  the  learner. 

"  I  can  say  that  I  conplder  it  an  excellent 
work  and  well  adapted  to  the  wants  of  our 
public  schools."—  W.  W.  CWrum.  Prin.  of 
High  School,  Springfield,  Mass. 

•'  If  any  young  man  masters  its  contents 
he  will  start  in  life  with  a  very  creditable 
knowled  e  of  the  way  in  which  the  busi- 
ness of  the  world  is  transacted,  and  will 
be  able  to  do  his  share  of  it,  too  "— C.  C. 
Sfaufer,  AM.,  Prin.  qf  Uigh  School,  Wil- 
liairwport.  Pa. 

"It  is  excellent.  We  like  it  exceeding- 
ly."—t7i?n>m«  Allen,  State  NoniuU  School, 
St.  Cloud,  Minn. 


"It  is  doubtful  whether  a  man  better 
fitted  than  Dr.  Thomson  to  write  such  a 
b()f>k  could  be  found  Ilis  books,  as  all 
v'  nted  with  them  know,  have 

-tronirly  toward  tlie  prac- 
-ubji'c't  treated,  and  when 
II  (unit  -  ill  a  work  liko  this  he  is  at  home. 
It  IS  iinpo-^ihle  to  go  into  particulars 
without  <)(C!i|)ying  too  much  space  Suf- 
fice it  to  .<ay  that  it  is  a  complete  business 
arithmetic  for  everybody,  triving  all  the 
short  wavs  of  compiitinL'  '■inplovcd  bvthe 
!      '  •      •  "  ••  ■    nil 

r  ry 

kind  uuuriiui  vj  ii^aucaiajii,  iSoslOn.  M<iiis. 


833  pages,  12mo,  cloth. 


CLARK  k  MAYNARD,  Publishers,  New  York. 


'♦*.  '•'*'•  '''*"• 


\j 


ILLUSTEATED 


FIKST    BOOK 


IN 


FEENCH. 


BY 

PROF.  JEAN  GUSTAVE  KEETELS, 

AUTHOR  OP  "  A  COLLEGIATE  FRXNCH  COURSE,"   "  AN  ANALYTICAL  FRENCH  READBB, 
"analytical  and  PRACTICAL  FRENCH  GRAMMAR,'"   "ELEMENTARY 
RSNCH     GRAMMAR,''    ETC.,    ETC.,    ETC. 


A  NEW  EDITION,  REVISED  AND  ENLARGED, 


NEW  YORK : 

Clark  &  Maynard,  Publishers, 

No.  771  Broadway,  67  &  69  Ninth  St, 
1886. 


PfiOF.  Keetels'  French  Seeies 


1.  A  €lilld'§  Illu§trated   Fir§t   Book   in   Frencli. 

144  pages,  12mo,  handsomely  bound  in  cloth.    Newly  revised. 

The  aim  of  this  book  is  to  make  the  Study  of  the  French  language  attractive 
ai/d  interesting  to  children,  who  have  no  knowledge  of  the  English  grammar. 
The  object-lesson  plan  has  been  adopted.  For  this  purpose,  the  volume  is  hand- 
■V>mely  illustrated  by  engravings  especially  prepared  for  the  book. 

3.  An  Ulementarjr  Frencli  Grammar.    S64  pages,  i2mo. 

This  work  is  designed  for  students  of  the  grammar  department.  Its  purpose  is 
lo  train  them  in  the  principles  of  French  grammar,  and  to  accustom  them  by  oral 
instruction  to  the  use  of  the  French  language. 

3«  An  Analytical  and  Practical  French  Orammar. 

524  pages,  12mo. 

This  book,  containing  the  advantage  of  the  oral  and  the  analytical  method  of 
instruction,  comprises  all  that  is  necessary  to  teach  the  French  language  eucces- 
fully,  both  theoretically  and  practically.  It  is  a  complete  grammar,  in  which  the 
principles  of  the  language  are  developed  in  a  logical  and  efficient  manner. 

4L,  A  Key  to  the  En;;Ii!«h  Fxcrci§e8  in  the  Analytical 
and  Practical  French  Orammar.    i2mo.  cioth.   75  cents. 

5*  A  Collegriate  Course  in  the  French  Lianguage, 

eomprising  a  complete  Grammar,  in  two  parts.  Arranged  and  prepared  for  the 
Study  of  French  in  Colleges  and  Collegiate  Institutions.  Part  First :  A  Treatise 
on  French  Pronunciation  ;  Rules  on  Gender ;  Etymology ;  Exercises  for  Transla- 
tion; the  Latin  Elements  common  to  both  the  French  and  the  English.  Part 
Second :  Syntax ;  a  Collection  of  Idioms ;  Exercises  for  Translation,  and  Voca- 
bulary. 

6.  A   Key  to  the  Engrlish  Exercises,  m  Part  second  of 

L  CoiXEQiATE  CoxTRss  IK  THB  FRENCH  Languags.    (For  Teachers  only.) 

7,  An  Analytical  French  Reader ;  with  English  Exercises 

for  Translation  and  Oral  Exercises  for  Practice  in  Speaking  ;  Questions  on  Gram- 
mar, with  References  to  the  Author's  several  Grammars.  Notes  and  Vocabulary. 
In  T-wo  Parts.  Part  Fikst  :  Selections  of  Fables,  Anecdotes,  and  Short  Stories. 
Pab^  Second  :  Selections  from  the  best  Modern  Writers.    320  pages,  12mo. 


HTITT 


PREFACE. 


U  i  hrc{  r  j 


This  volume  takes  its  appropriate  place,  as  A  Child's 
First  Book  in  French,  by  tlie  side  of  my  Elementary  French 
Grammar,  and  my  Analytical  and  Practical  French  Gram- 
mar. The  three  works  are  not  necessarily  connected;  each 
takes  up  the  subject  at  its  first  principles,  but  in  each  a  dif- 
ferent mode  of  instruction  is  adopted,  suited  to  the  different 
ages  of  the  scholars  for  whom  the  books  are  written. 

The  present  work  is  intended  for  children  who  can  read, 
but  who  have  not  yet  any  knowledge  of  the  grammar  of 
their  own  language.  For  this  class  of  scholars  object-teach- 
ing seems  the  most  suitable ;  that  is,  connecting  the  instruc- 
tion with  an  object  presented  to  the  eye.  This  mode  has 
been  generally  followed  in  the  lessons  in  this  book.  Pictures 
have  been  prepared  for  the  purpose,  and  the  lessons,  in  Part 
First,  directly  refer  to  the  objects  in  the  pictures.  Each 
lesson  is  headed  by  a  name,  which,  in  connection  with  the 
illustration,  helps  to  impress  the  subject-matter  of  the  les- 
son upon  the  mind,  enables  the  student  to  recall  it  more 
readily,  and  creates  a  more  lively  interest. 

In  Part  Second,  the  lessons  refer  to  the  illustrations  in 
part  First,  recall  the  name  of  each  picture,  enlarge  upon 
the  subject,  and,  by  associating  new  ideas  with  it,  keep  alive 
the  interest. 

The  English  is  given  in  all  the  reading  lessons,  word  for 
word,  underneath  the  French,  so  that  the  students  may 
know  the  meaning  of  each  word  which  they  pronounce, 
without  referring  to  the  vocabularies.     This  plan  possesses, 

507 


4  PREFACE. 

besides,  the  advantage  of  showing  the  difference  in  the  con- 
struction of  the  two  languages.  A  correct  English  version 
of  the  French  exercises  follows  in  Part  Third. 

Finally,  Part  Fourth  contains  a  glance  at  the  parts  of 
speech,  with  paradigms  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  and  of  the 
four  regular  conjugations,  as  an  introduction  to  the  study 
of  grammar. 

The  lessons  are  progressive.  Beginning  with  the  simple 
elements,  they  gradually  advance,  and  develop,  in  a  practical 
course,  the  first  principles,  which  are  the  groundwork  of 
grammar. 

It  may  perhaps  be  urged  as  an  objection  that  the  develop- 
ment is  too  rapid,  and  that  the  lessons  towards  the  end  of 
Part  Second  are  too  complicated.  This  ground  of  objection 
is  more  apparent  than  real.  The  book  contains  matter  for 
a  two  years'  course  of  instruction,  which  may  even  be  ex- 
tended beyond  that  period.  Students  who  enter  upon  the 
course  at  nine  or  ten  years  of  age,  will  not  have  completed 
it  before  they  are  twelve  or  thirteen.  The  average  intellect 
of  that  age  can  understand  all  the  English  in  the  exercises, 
and  hence  can  acquire  a  practical  knowledge  of  the  same  in 
French. 

The  favor  with  which  my  former  works  of  this  series  have 
been  received  by  eminent  teachers  in  New  York  and  other 
cities,  and  by  an  appreciative  public  in  general,  leads  me  to 
believe  that  this  volume  will  meet  with  a  kind  reception, 
and  will  readily  secure  for  itself  a  careful  inspection.  My 
thanks  are  due  in  advance  to  all  who,  after  a  thorough 
examination  of  it,  will  express  a  candid  criticism. 

THE  AUTHOR. 

Brooklyn",  March,  1875. 


tlAA^  tjU^ 


\yjl-^y 


OOK"TENTS. 


Page 

Preface 3 

Contents 5 

To  Teachers 7 

iNTBOnUOTION. 9 

Alphabet 9 

Orthographic  Signs 10 

Vowel-Sounds 10 

Diphthongs 11 

Consonants H 

Liquid  Letters l^i 

Final  Letters 12 

Division  of  Words  into  Syllables. ...  12 

Elision 12 

Exercises  in  Pronouncing 13 

"         on  Words  Common  to  both 

Langnaijes 15 

Proper  Names  of   Persons  and   of 

Cities 18 

Part  Fiust 19 

Charles  and  Mary 20 

Papa  and  Mamma 21 

Father,  Mother  and  Child 22 

The  Gate  of  the  Garden 23 

Henry's  Boat 24 

My  Uncle  and  Aunt 25 

The  Dog  Turco 26 

The  Friends 27 

TheWalk 28 

The  Uncle  and  the  Little  One 29 

The  Nnrsery 30 

Studying 31 

To  School...   32 

The  Days  of  the  Week 33 

In  the  Parlor 84 

The  Present a5 

At  Breakfast 36 

After  the  Meal 87 


Paob 

At  a  Picnic 38 

At  the  Banquet 39 

The  Dance  on  the  Sward 40 

The  Return 41 

At  Work 42 

The  Canary  Birds 43 

Under  the  Trees 44 

The  Race 45 

Mine  and  Thine 46 

The  New  Clothes 47 

The  Choice 43 

These  and  Those 49 

The  Salutation 50 

An  Acquaintance 51 

The  Vihit 52 

On  Horseback  and  in  a  Carriage 53 

Sunrise  54 

TheDepaiture 55 

On  the  Ice 66 

The  Weather 57 

Mamma's  Birthday 58 

The  Evening  Party 59 

The  Governess 60 

Part  Second 61 

Charles  and  Mary,—  Continued 63 

Father,  Mother  and  Child  "      64 

Henry's  Boat                      "      65 

The  Dog  Turco                   "      66 

Tie  Walk                             "      67 

The  Nursery                        **      68 

To  School                            *•      69 

In  the  Parlor                       "      70 

At  Breakfast                        "      71 

At  a  Picnic                          *'      72 

The  Dance  on  the  Sward  "      73 

At  Work                              "      74 

Under  the  Trees                 **      75 


6 


CONTENTS. 


Page 

Mine  and  Thine  Continued  76 

The  Choice  *'  77 

The  Salutation  "  78 

TheViat  "  79 

Sunrise  "  80 

On  the  Ice  "  81 

Mamma's  Birthday   "  82 

A  Visit  to  the  Market. 83 

Our  House 85 

The  Parlor 88 

The  Library 91 

The  Dining-room 93 

The  Kitchen 95 

My  Room 98 

Part  Third 119 

A  Correct  English  Version  of  tlie 
French  Exercises  in  Part  First 
and  Part  Second 121 


Pagc 

Part  Poukth 147 

A  Glance  at  tlie  Parts  of  Speech 147 

Definitions  of  the  Parts  of  Speech..  147 

The  Noun 143 

The  Article 149 

The  Adj  ective 149 

The  Pronoun 154 

The  Verb 156 

Avoir,  to  have 156 

Stre,  to  be 158 

Parler,  to  speak 159 

Finir,  to  finish 161 

Recevoir,  to  receive 162 

Vendre,  to  sell 164 

The  Adverb 165 

The  Preposition 166 

The  Conjunction 167 

The  Interjection 167 


At  the  suggestion  of  many  of  the  friends  of  this  little  volume, 
the  author  has  added  the  following 


HISTORIETTES. 

Text.  Note*. 

1.  Les  Peches.... X  Mat-mier 101  139 

2.  Les  Praises Schmid 103  140 

3.  Les  Cerises "      104  140 

4.  Les  Prunes  " 106  141 

5.  Le  Pot  de  Miel "      107  142 

6.  Le  Navet " 109  142 

7.  La  Probite  Re'compensee Maritan 110  143 

8.  L*  Ogre Schmid 113  144 

9.  La  Mendiante "      115  145 

10.  La  Cigale  et  la  Fourmi    La  Fontaine 118  146 


TO  TEACHEES. 


This  work  contains  Four  Parts  and  an  Introduction. 

The  Introduction  treats  of  the  letters  and  their  sounds,  and  gives  a 
few  exercises  in  pronouncing.  The  explanations  on  the  sounds  of 
the  letters  are  not  written  for  the  children. 

The  scholars  should  learn  the  names  of  the  letters,  either  the  new 
names  or  the  old.  The  exercises  in  pronouncing  may  at  first  be  omit 
ted.  It  is  not  deemed  expedient  to'  teach  pronunciation  to  children 
bj  means  of  abstract  sounds.  The  better  way  is  to  teach  them  to 
pronounce  short  words  of  simple  import,  the  names  of  objects  with 
which  they  are  acquainted.  The  first  lessons  in  Part  First  have 
been  framed  with  this  view;  take,  for  instance,  the  following  sen- 
tence, which  contains  six  pure  vowel  sounds: 

0\^  est  le  de  de  Marie  ? 

9.     4.    2.    3.     2.       1.    5.      (p.  10.) 

When  they  can  pronounce  such  a  sentence  well,  they  should  be 
taught  to  give  the  simple  vowel-sounds  which  it  contains,  and  be 
referred  to  the  part  of  the  introduction  that  treats  of  them. 
While  students  are  progressing  in  the  course,  it  will  be  found  ben- 
eficial to  resort  from  time  to  time  to  the  exercises  in  pronouncing, 
and  to  keep  up  this  practice  throughout. 

Part  First  contains  twenty  illustrations.  There  are  connected  with 
each  illustration  two  French  reading  exercises,  with  the  English, 
word  for  word,  underneath  the  French.  The  sentences,  which  are 
simple,  but  progressive,  refer  to  the  objects  in  the  pictures.  Each 
exercise  is  preceded  by  a  vocabulary,  which  contains  the  words  that 
are  used  for  the  first  time  in  these  lessons. 

The  students  should  learn  to  pronounce  the  words  in  the  vocabu- 
lanes  from  the  teacher,  who  should  recite  them  with  the  class,  until 
they  can  pronounce  each  word  correctly. 

The  French  sentences  of  the  exercise  should  be  read  to  the  class ; 
the  scholars  should,  in  turn,  follow  the  pronunciation  of  the  teacher. 
They  should  understand  the  French  when  the  teacher  pronounces  it, 
and  be  able  to  translate  it,  without  looking  in  the  book. 


8  TO  TEACHEB8. 

After  a  lesson  has  been  learned,  the  teacher  should  refer  to  Part 
Thiid,  and  call  the  attention  of  the  students  to  any  difference  which 
exists  in  the  construction  of  the  two  languages. 

The  facts  indicative  of  principles  in  Etymology  are  given  in  the 
vocabularies,  and  afterwards  illustrated  in  the  exercises.  The  teacher 
should  call  the  attention  of  the  class  to  these  facts,  and  explain 
them,  as  far  as  the  students  are  able  to  understand  them.  These 
facts  gradually  unfold  the  leading  principles  in  Etymology.  The 
treatment  of  the  verb  does  not  extend  beyond  the  tenses  of  the  indic- 
ative mode,  the  infinitive  and  the  imperative. 

When  the  class  has  reached  the  end  of  Part  First,  the  study  of 
which  ought  to  occupy  them  for  the  term  of  one  school-year,  they 
should  review,  by  translating  the  correct  English  version  in  Part 
Third  into  French,  and,  if  practicable,  they  should  write  the  sentences 
on  the  blackboard. 

Part  Second  contains  no  further  development  of  principles.  The 
Exercises  refer  to  tlie  illustrations  in  Part  First,  explore  the  ground 
more  thoroughly,  add  to  the  knowledge  of  words,  and  generally 
assume  the  form  of  conversations,  by  questions  and  answers.  When 
this  part  is  reached,  the  teacher  may  vary  the  sentences  in  the  les- 
son, by  incorporating  the  known  elements  in  new  forms  of  expres- 
sion. It  is  the  intention  of  the  author  to  have  the  illustrations 
enlarged  for  wall-tableaux,  to  be  used  witK  the  class  for  such  a  pur- 
pose. 

Part  Second  is  to  be  treated  in  the  same  manner  as  Part  First, 
and  is  to  occupy  the  class  another  year. 

At  the  close  of  the  second  year,  the  scholars  are  supposed  to  be 
sufficiently  advanced  in  their  English  studies  to  begin  the  study  of 
Grammar,  in  Part  Fourth.  As  they  become  gradually  acquainted 
with  the  different  parts  of  speech,  they  should  learn  to  distinguish 
them  in  their  reading  exercises.  For  this  purpose,  a  section  of  a  lesson, 
towards  the  close  of  Part  Second,  beginning  with  the  Market,  for 
instance,  may  be  selected,  from  which  they  should  write  down,  in 
French  and  English,  first,  all  the  nouns,  then  the  adjectives,  pro. 
nouns,  etc.  They  may  afterwards  write  the  same  exercises  from 
dictation,  compose  similar  exercises,  and  use  the  same  elements  in  a 
variety  of  ways.  It  is  one  of  the  secrets  of  the  profession,  to  vary 
the  food,  in  order  to  excite  the  appetite ;  to  which  may  be  added 
another  one,  expressed  in  the  Latin  adage, 

Festina  lente. 


INTEODUOTIOK 


The  French  Alphabet. 

Ola  Names. 

New  Names. 

3 

Old  Names. 

New  Names.* 

A,   a, 

ah, 

4 

K,  n, 

euii, 

lie. 

B,  b, 

bay, 

be. 

0,    0, 

o. 

4 

C,    c, 

say. 

se. 

P,  P, 

•piiy. 

pe. 

D,  a, 

day. 

(le. 

0,  q, 

3 

> 

que. 

E,  e, 

eh, 

e». 

E,  r, 

err. 

re. 

r,  f, 

eff, 

fe. 

S.    s. 

ess, 

se. 

G,   g, 

jay'> 

gue. 

T,  t, 

tay. 

te. 

H,  h, 

ash. 

he. 

U,  n. 

> 

4 

I,    i, 

ee. 

V^ 

V,  V, 

vay, 

ve. 

J,   j, 

jee". 

je. 

W.w, 

double  vay, 

ve. 

K,  k, 

kah, 

ke. 

X,  X, 

ix. 

kze. 

L,    1, 

el, 

le. 

Y.  y, 

ee-greck, 

4 

M,  m, 

emm,          me. 
le  above  letters  six 

Z,  z, 

zed, 
is  ;  viz. : 

ze. 

Oft! 

are  vowel 

a,    e, 

i,    0,    X 

'.  y-' 

The  others  are  consonants. 

The  10  is  not  a  French  letter.  It  is  found  in  a  few  for, 
eign  words  which  have  been  introduced  into  the  French 
language,  and  is  pronounced  the  same  as  the  v, 

»  The  J*  is  pronounced  with  a  soft  breatliing,  the  same  as  8  In  pUaswe. 
«  The  q  and  u  have  m  corn'?pondinf|:  sounds  in  Engliph. 
»  The  e  in  this  column  has  nearly  the  sound  of  u  in  burr. 

*  Old  name. 

•  The  y  has  the  same  pound  as  the  i. 

1* 


10  INTRODUCTION. 


1,  Orthographic  Signs* 

The  written  language  has  accents,  cedilla,  dicerem,  apostrophe, 
hyphen,  and  the  ordinary  punctuation  marks. 

There  are  three  accents  : 

The  acute  accent  (') ;  as,  e  ; 

The  grave  accent  (')  ;  as,  e,  d,  u ; 

Tiie  circuinjlex  accent  (^)  ;  as,  d,  e,  i,  6,  U. 

An  accent  over  the  vowel  e  indicates  a  modification  of  its  sound : 

The  e  {acute)  has  the  sound  of  the  English  letter  a  ; 

The  e  {grave)  has  the  sound  of  ai  in  fair; 

The  e  {circumflex)  has  the  same  sound  as  e,  but  broader. 

The  cedilla  ( J  is  placed  under  the  c  (9)  when  c  has  the  sound  of  » 
before  a,  0,  u;  otherwise,  it  sounds,  before  these  vowels,  the  same 
as  k. 

The  diceresis  {")  is  placed  over  a  vowel  which  begins  a  new  sylla- 
ble after  another  vowel  ;  as,  mais  (ma-is). 

The  apostrophe  (')  indicates  the  suppression  of  a  vowel  ;  as,  I'ami 
for  le  ami ;  I'homme  for  le  homme. 

The  hyphen  (-)  serves  to  connect  two  or  more  words,  or  parts  of  a 
word  ;  as,  ai-je  ;  arc-en-ciel. 

2.  Vowel' Sounds, 

There  are  nine  pure  vowel-sounds,  and  four  nasal  vowel-sounds. 

1,  Pure  Vowel- Sounds. 
The  pure  vowel-sounds  are  : 

a,    e,    e,    e  or  §,    i  or  y,    o,    u,    eu,    ou. 

The  following  compound  vowels  represent  some  of  the  pure  vowel 
sounds : 

ea  sounds  as  a.  aie,  ais,  or  ait,  sounds  as  ^. 

ee        **       "  e.  au,  or  eau  '*       "  0. 

ai        •*       *'  e.  oeu  **       **  eu. 

2.  Nasal  Vowel- Sounds. 
The  four  nasal  vowel-sounds  are  : 

an,    in,    on,    un. 


INTRODUCTIOIf,  U 

M,  preceded  by  a  vowel,  has  the  nasal  sound  of  n.  Em,  or  en, 
has  the  nasal  sound  of  an;  but  en,  preceded  by  i,  has  the  nasal 
sound  of  in. 

The  nasal  sounds  are  represented  by 


an  "]                 in    ' 

am                   im 

en   1    ~      '    ain 

om                    um) 

emj                aim  J 

M  and  n,  when  doubl 

e  or  followed  by  a  vowel,  are  not  nasal. 

S,  Diphthongs, 

A  diphthong  is  a  combination  of  two  vowel-sounds  which  are  both 
heard  in  pronouncing. 
Pure  diphthongs,  ia,  ie,  leu,  oi,  one,  oui,  ui,  etc. 
Nasal  diphthongs,  ian,  ien,  ion,  oin,  uin,  etc. 


4,  Consonants, 

The  consonants  are  pronounced  the  same  as  in  English,  with  some 
exceptions. 

O  before  e,  i,  y,  or  9  before  a,  0  u,  has  the  sound  of  s ;  c,  in  all 
oilier  cases,  has  the  sound  of  k. 

Oh,  followed  by  a  vowel,  has  generally  the  sound  of  sh  ;  but  ch, 
followed  by  a  consonant,  has  the  sound  of  k.  Oh  lias  the  sound  of 
k  in  words  from  the  Greek  and  Hebrew  ;  as,  echo,  Oham. 

G  before  e,  i,  y,  has  the  sound  of  s  in  pleasure  ;  before  a,  0,  u,  it 
has  the  sound  of  the  English  g  in  gate. 

H  is  silent.  It  is  called  aspirate  when  a  preceding  vowel  (e  or  a) 
is  not  elided  before  it  (8). 

S  has  the  hissing  sound  of  c  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or  sylla 
ble  ;  but  between  two  vowels,  it  has  the  sound  of  z.  Double  s  (««), 
between  two  vowels,  has  always  the  sound  of  c. 

Sch  has  the  sound  of  sh. 

T  has,  in  some  words,  the  sound  of  e  ;  as,  nation. 

Th  is  sounded  like  t  ;  as,  the. 

X  is  a  double  letter.  It  sometimes  represents  the  sound  of  gz ; 
AS,  exrmen;  sometimes  of  kz ;  as,  maxima;  sometimes  of  ««/  as, 
soixante;  and  sometimes  of  z;  as,  deuxieme. 


12  INTRODUCTION. 


5,  Liquid  Letter s^ 

G  and  1  are  called  liquid  letters  when  tliey  are  pronounced  so 
smoothly  that  their  natural  sounds  are  not  heard. 

G  is  liquid  before  n,  as  in  the  English  word  mignonette. 

li  is  generally  liquid  when  it  is  preceded  by  i.  The  liquid  sound 
of  1  is  heard  in  the  English  word  brilliant. 

6,  Final  Letters, 

Unaccented  final  e  is  silent  in  words  of  more  than  one  syllable. 

A  final  consonant  is  generally  silent.  But  a  final  consonant  before 
a  word  that  begins  with  a  vowel  or  an  unaspirated  h,  is  generally 
pronounced  with  the  next  syllable;  as,  Vous  ^tes  men  ami,  pro- 
nounced Vou  zet  mo  nami. 

Final      d     before  a  vowel  is  sounded  like  t :  quand  iL 

**         f         **  **  "  "     v :  neuf  heures. 

g        "  "  "  "    Jc :  ran^leve. 

*'     s  or  X     *'  "  "  *•    z :  ils  ont  deux"enfants. 

The  t  of  et  {and)  and  the  z  of  assez  {enough)  are  never  pronounced. 

7.  Division  of  Words  into  Syllables, 

In  dividing  words  into  syllables,  a  single  consonant  between  two 
vowels  belongs  to  the  vowel  that  follows  ;  as,  raser  {ra-ser). 

The  first  part  of  a  double  consonant  belongs  to  the  vowel  that  pre- 
cedes ;  the  second,  to  the  vowel  that  follows  ;  the  latter  only  is  pro- 
nounced ;  as,  addition,  pronounced  a-di-cion. 

Two  consonants  in  the  middle  of  a  word  are  separated ;  as,  parler 
(par-ler) ;  except  the  following  combinations,  which  are  inseparable, 
and  pronounced  with  the  vowel  that  follows  :  bl,  br,  ch,  chl,  chr,  cl, 
cr,  dl,  dr,  fl,  fr,  gl,  gn,  gr,  gu,  ph,  phi,  pi,  pr,  qu,  rJi,  th,  thl,  thr,  tr,  vr, 

8,  Elision, 

The  final  e  of  words  of  one  syllable,  and  the  a  of  la,  are  elided 
(suppressed)  before  a  word  that  begins  with  a  vowel  or  an  unaspirated 
h,  and  an  apostrophe  indicates  the  elision.  The  consonant  with  the 
apostrophe  is  pronounced  with  the  next  vowel  as  one  syllable.  J'ai 
{je)  for  je-ai,  I'orange  [lorange)  for  la  orange,  I'habit  ilabit)  for  le 
habit.     The  t  of  d  is  elided  before  il,  ils. 


INTRODUCTION.  13 


Exercises  in  JPronoiincing, 

(The  pnpil  should  name  the  letters  iu  Freucli,  giving  to  each  vowel  its  proper 

sound.) 

1.  Pure  Vowel-Sounds  Combined  with  Consonants. 
[Final  consonants  are  silent,  except  those  marked  by  an  asterisk  (*).] 


a 

e: 

e: 

e  or  i 

j;  1  or  y 

:  o; 

u: 

eu: 

ou: 

ba 

be. 

be. 

be. 

bi. 

bo. 

bu. 

beu. 

bou. 

fc: 

ca. 

que, 

que. 

que. 

qui. 

CO, 

cu. 

queu, 

,  cou. 

k: 

cla, 

cle. 

cle, 

cle, 

cri. 

cro. 

cru. 

creu, 

crou. 

s: 

Qa, 

ce. 

ce. 

ce. 

ci. 

90, 

9u, 

ceu, 

90U. 

sh: 

clia, 

Che, 

che, 

che. 

chi. 

cho. 

chu. 

cheu. 

chou, 

k: 

chla, 

chle. 

chle. 

chl6. 

chri. 

cliro. 

chru, 

chreu 

,chrou 

da, 

de. 

de, 

de. 

di, 

do. 

du, 

deu. 

dou. 

fa, 

fe, 

fe. 

fe. 

fi, 

fo. 

fu, 

feu. 

fou. 

g  Tiard: 

ga. 

gue. 

gue. 

gue. 

gui, 

go. 

gu. 

gueu, 

,  gou. 

gsoft: 

gea. 

ge, 

ge, 

ge. 

gi, 

geo, 

geu. 

ha, 

he. 

he, 

h^, 

hi. 

ho. 

hu. 

heu. 

hou. 

ja. 

je. 

je. 

je. 

Ji, 

Jo, 

ju. 

jeu. 

jou. 

la. 

le. 

le. 

le. 

li, 

lo. 

lu. 

leu. 

lou. 

ma. 

me. 

me, 

m^. 

mi. 

mo. 

mu, 

meu, 

mou. 

na. 

ne. 

ne. 

ne. 

ni, 

no. 

nu. 

neu. 

nou. 

pa. 

pe, 

p6. 

pe, 

pi. 

po. 

pu. 

peu. 

pou. 

qua. 

que, 

que. 

que. 

qui. 

quo. 

queu. 

quou, 

ra. 

re. 

re. 

re, 

ri, 

ro. 

ru. 

reu. 

rou. 

sa. 

se, 

se. 

se, 

si. 

so. 

su. 

seu. 

sou. 

ta. 

te. 

te. 

t^. 

ti. 

to. 

tu, 

teu, 

tou. 

va. 

ve. 

ve. 

v^. 

vi. 

vo, 

vu, 

veu. 

vou. 

xa. 

xe, 

xe, 

xe. 

xi. 

xo. 

xu. 

xeu. 

xoa. 

za. 

ze. 

ze. 

z^. 

zi. 

zo. 

zu. 

zeu. 

zou. 

2.  Compound  Vowel-Sounds  Combined  with  Consonants. 

dau,  maux,  faux, 
beau,  seau,  teau. 
eu,       edt,       eutes. 


ea 
6e 

=  a 

=  e: 

•  gea, 
dee. 

jea, 
fee. 

lee. 

au    =  0 : 
eau  =  0  : 

ai 

—  e: 

j'ai. 

lai. 

rai. 

eu    =  u: 

aie  j 

1 

ais 
ait  ) 

1 

plaie. 

mais. 

lait. 

OBU  =  eu 

14 


INTRODUCTION, 


on:  en, 
in :  lin, 
on:  son, 
Vm:  brun. 


3.  Nasal  Vowel-Sounds. 

sans,  cent,  sens,*  dent, 
timbre,  simple,  faim,  pain, 
long,       rond,      gond,     plomb. 


Bang, 

vin, 

bon, 

aucun,  cliacun. 


quand,    banc, 
daim,       eein. 
ombre,    sombre, 
tribun,  commun,  parfum,  humble 


4.  Pure  Diphthongs. 


ia:    fia,      lia,       cria,    scia.  ieu:    pieu,    lieu,    mieux,  cieux. 

ie:   tier,     lier,      crie,     scie.  oi:      foi,       loi,      moi,      toi. 

iel:  fiel,*  miel,*  ciel,*  tiel*  {ciel).     ui:     bruit,  fruit,  lui,        nuit. 

5.  Nasal  Diphthongs. 

ien:  bien,  lien,    mien,  rien.  oin:  foin,  loin,    soin,  poing. 

ion:  lion,  rions,  scion,  tion  {don).       nin:  juin,  suint. 


gn: 

il,  ille: 
eil,  eille: 
ail,  aille: 


6.  Liquid  Letters. 
campagne,       montagne,       ligne, 


rognon, 
fusil, 
soleil, 
betail, 
eiul,  euille:      deuil, 
ouil,  ouille:      bouillir. 


oignon, 

babil, 

pareil, 

travail, 

fauteuil. 


poignee, 

brille, 

sommeil, 

paille, 

feuille. 


signe. 

poignard. 

coquille. 

oreille. 

bataille. 

cueille. 

rouille. 


e  =  «  in  htirr,  de, 
e  final,  silent,    S^ge, 
e  almost  silent,  cable, 
e       "  "      besoin, 

pronounce  (b'soin) 
e  =  e,  et, 

pronounce  (e). 


bouillon,  bouille, 

7.  The  Unaccented  e. 

ce,  le,  me,       ne,  que. 

base,  cage,         fille,      forme,     liste. 

fable,  table,         sabre,    marbre,  mitre, 

aclieter,  demande,  elever,  samedi,   demi, 

,  (acli'te),  (d'mand),  (el've),  (sam'di),  (d'mi). 

rez,  clef,  bled,     pied,        parler, 

(re)  (cle),         (ble),     (pie),       (parle). 


8.  Elision. 

L*or,  I'argent,  d'or,  d'argent,  I'enfant,  I'liomme.  L'orange  qu'il  m'a 
donnee.  L'habit  qu'il  t'a  fait.  L'ami  I'a  mis  dans  I'eau.  S'il  t'a  dit 
eela  (c'la).  S'ils  I'ont  vu.  S'il  s'en  va.  S'il  s'y  fie.  J'ai  I'ftnanas. 
J'aurai  l'orange.     Qu'en  dit-on  ? 


INTRODUCTION. 


15 


9.  Final  Consonants  Before  Initial  Vowels. 

Je  vous  ai  fait  appeler.  Vous  6tes  arrive  apres  elle.  Quand  on  est  alle 
I'appeler,  il  etait  endormi.  II  n'etait  pas  encore  neuf  lieures.  II  etait  en- 
core en  bas.  lis  ont  dix  enfants.  C'est  un  grand  homme.  II  est  ici, 
et  elle  aussi.    C'est  assez  evident. 

Exercises  on   Words  Coninion  to  Both 
Langucujes. 

(The  orthography  of  these  words  is  alike  or  nearly  alike  in  both  languages  ;  the 
chief  difference  is  in  the  pronunciation.) 


1. 

Words  in  ade. 

Arcade, 

arcade; 

limonade, 

lemonade; 

ballade, 

ballad; 

parade. 

parade; 

balustrade, 

balustrade; 

promenade. 

promenade; 

brigade, 

brigade; 

^ommade, 

pomade; 

camarade, 

comrade; 

salade, 

salad; 

And  many 

others. 

2. 

Words 

in  age. 

Age, 

age; 

langage, 

language; 

bandage, 

bandage; 

page. 

page; 

cage. 

cage; 

passage, 

passage; 

carnage, 

carnage; 

sage. 

sage; 

courage. 

courage; 

village, 

village; 

And  many 

others. 

3 

:.  Words  in  al. 

Animal, 

animal ; 

hopital, 

hospital; 

caporal. 

corporal ; 

journal. 

journal; 

camaval, 

carnival; 

metal, 

metal ; 

general, 

general; 

principal, 

principal; 

And  many  others. 


16 


INTRODUCTION. 


4.  Words  in  aire  j    English  sirj. 


Adversaire,      adversary ; 
dictionnaire,     dictionary; 
dromadaire,      dromedary; 
militaire,           military ; 
And  many  others. 

notaire, 
pensionnaire, 
rosaire, 
secretaire, 

notary; 
pensionary; 
rosary; 
secretary; 

5.  Wordi 

( in  ance  and  ence. 

Alliance            alliance; 
assistance,         assistance; 
balance,             balance; 
enfance,            infancy; 
And  many  others. 

indolence, 
prudence, 
silence, 
violence, 

indolence; 
prudence; 
silence; 
violence; 

6.  Words 
Acteur,             actor; 
auteur,              author; 
ambassadeur,  embassador; 
conducteur,      conductor; 
And  many  others. 

inenVf    English  or. 
createur, 
inspecteur, 
interieur, 
superieur, 

creator; 
inspector; 
interior; 
superior; 

7. 

Words  in  ion. 

Action,              action; 
ambition,           ambition; 
crfeation,            creation ; 
nation,               nation; 
And  many  others. 

notion, 
procession, 
profusion, 
proportion, 

notion; 
procession; 
profusion; 
proportion; 

8. 
Ambre,             amber; 
chambre,           chamber; 
cidre,                 cider; 
lettre,                letter; 
And  many  others. 

Words  in  re. 
mitre, 
sabre, 
theatre. 

miter; 
saber; 
theater; 

9. 

Words  in  ice. 

Caprice,            caprice; 
edifice,              edifice; 
malice,              malice; 

office, 

service, 

Vice, 

office; 

service; 

vioe; 

And  many  otherg. 


INTRODUCTION.  17 


10.  Words  having  a  final  e  in  French  and  not  in  English. 

Artiste,  artist;  joumaliste,  journalist; 

buste,  bust;  liste,  list; 

dentiste,  dentist;  terme,  term; 

forme,  form;  verbe,  verb; 

And  many  others. 

11.  Words  having  a  final  e  in  English  and  not  in  French. 

Candidal,  candidate;  magistrat,  magistrate; 

chocolat  chocolate;  prelat,  prelate; 

certificat,  certificate;  senat,  senate; 

And  some  others. 

13.   Words  ending  in  te  in  French  and  in  ty  in  English. 

Beaute,  beauty;  liberie,  liberty; 

calamite,  calamity;  qualite,  quality; 

depute,  deputy;  societe,  society; 

And  some  others. 

13.   Words  ending  in  French  in  ie  and  in  Eiglish  in  y. 

Aristocratie,    aristocracy;  democratic,  democracy; 

broderie,  embroidery;  flatterie,  flattery; 

cavalerie,         cavalry;  maladie,  malady; 
And  some  others. 

14.  Words  ending  in  ique  j    English  ic. 

Arithmetique,  arithmetic;  musique,  music; 

fabrique,  fabric;  pique-nique,  picnic; 

logique,  logic;  touique  tonic; 

And  gome  others. 

15.  Words  in  ure. 

Agfriculture,     agriculture;  figure,  figure; 

aventure,  adventure;  littferature,  literature; 

creature,  creatwr**.;  nature^  nature; 

And  some  oth*»'^ 


18 


INTRODUCTION, 


Some  Proper  Names  of  Persona. 


Ada, 

Adah; 

Gautier, 

Walter; 

Adele, 

Adela; 

Geoffiroy, 

Jeffry; 

Adolphe, 

Adolphus; 

Georges, 

George; 

Agnes, 

Agnes; 

Gregoire, 

Gregory; 

Amelie, 

Amelia; 

Guillaume, 

William; 

Anne, 

Ann;  Anna; 

Gustave, 

Gustavus; 

Annette, 

Nancy; 

Helene, 

Helen; 

Antoine, 

Anthony; 

Henri, 

Henry; 

Arnaud, 

Arnold; 

Henriette, 

Henrietta; 

Berthe, 

Bertha; 

Isabelle, 

Isabella; 

Blanche, 

Blanch; 

Jacques, 

James; 

Brigitte, 

Bridget; 

Jean, 

John ; 

Camille, 

Camilla; 

Jules, 

Julius; 

OeUe, 

Celia; 

Julie, 

Julia; 

Charles, 

Charles; 

Laure, 

Laura; 

Chariot, 

Charley; 

Leonard, 

Leonard; 

Olotilde, 

Clotilda; 

Ijisette, 

Lizzie; 

Denis, 

Dennis; 

Louis, 

Louis; 

Edmond, 

Edmund; 

Louise, 

Louisa; 

Bdouard, 

Edward; 

Lucie, 

Lucy; 

Elie, 

EHas; 

Marguerite, 

Margaret; 

Elisee, 

Elisha; 

Marie, 

Mary; 

Enule, 

^milius; 

Mathilde, 

Matilda; 

Emilie, 

Emily; 

Sophie, 

Sophia; 

Htienne, 

Stephen; 

Susanne, 

Susanna. 

Some  Proper 

Names  of  Cities. 

Anvers, 

Antwerp ; 

La  Haye, 

The  Hague 

Berlin, 

Berlin ; 

Londres, 

London  ; 

Brdme, 

Bremen ; 

Lyon, 

Lyons ; 

Bruxelles, 

Brussels; 

Madrid, 

Madrid ; 

Calais, 

Calais  ; 

Mayence, 

Mentz ; 

Cologne, 

Cologne  ; 

Naples, 

Naples  ; 

Dresde, 

Dresden  ; 

Paris, 

Paris  ; 

Edinbourg, 

Edinburgh ; 

Rome, 

Rome; 

Francfort, 

Frankfort ; 

Venise, 

Venice  ; 

Le  Havre, 

Havre ; 

Vienne, 

Vienna. 

PAET   FIRSTc 


20 


CHARLES  AND  MARY. 


a,  has ; 
de,  of ; 
dfe,  thimble ; 
clef,  key ; 


1,  Vocabulary. 

le,  la,  the  ; 

le  de,  the  thimble  ; 
la  clef,  the  key ; 
et,  and ; 


est,  is ; 

qui,  who ; 

ou,  where ; 

ici,  here ;  la,  th^e. 


2,  Charles  et  Marie.     {CJmrUs  and  Mary.) 

Qui  a  le    d6  de  Marie? 

Who  has  the  thimble  of        Mary  ?    {Mary's  thimble). 

Claries  a  le    de  de  Marie. 

Jharles     has   the  thimble  of         Mary. 

Ou  est  Charles? 

Where     is  Charles? 

Charles  est  ici. 


Charles 


is      here. 


Ou  ^ni  la  clef  de  Charles? 

Where     *•     the      key      of  Charles?    (Charles's kev.) 

La  clef  de  Charles  est  la. 


The       key      of 


Charles 


is    there. 


Le  d^    et  la  clef. 

The  thimble  and  the      key. 


PAPA  AND  MAMMA. 


21. 


3,  Vocabulary, 


je  vois,  I  see ; 
papa,  papa ; 
maman,  mamma ; 
le  sofa,  the  sofa  ; 
la  chaise,  the  chair ; 
la  table,  the  table ; 


sur,  on,  upon ; 

sous,  under ; 

voici,  {see  here),  here  is,  here  are ; 

voila,  {see  t/iere),  there  is,  there  are  • 

c'est,  (fo7'  ce  est),  that  is,  it  is  ; 

Anne,  Ann  ;  Elise,  Eliza  ; 

ou,  or. 


4.  Papa  et  Maman,     {Papa  and  Mamma.) 

Je  vois  papa  et  inainan, 

I  see         papa     and     mamma, 

sur  le  sofa. 

on     the      sofa. 

Voici  Charles  et  Marie. 

Here  are         Charles     and       Mary. 

Voila  la  clef  de  Charles,  sur  la  table. 

There  is   the      key      of  Charles,        on       the      table. 

Oil  est  la  chaise? 

Where    is       the        chdr? 

La  chaise  est  sous  la  table. 

The        chair         is        under    the       table. 

Qui  est  la? 

Who       is  there? 

C'est  Anne  ou  Elise. 

It  is  Ann         or       Eliza. 


un  homme.  a  man ; 
un  enfant,  a  child  ; 
un  arbre,  a  tree ; 


5»  un,  une,  a  or  an. 


une  femme,  a  woman  ; 
une  orange,  an  orange  ; 
une  maison,  a  house. 


JU^ 


23 


FATHER,  MOTHER,  AND  CHILD. 


0»   Vocabulary, 

le  pere,  the  fatlier ;  a  la  maison,  to  tlie  house  ; 

la  mere,  the  mother  ;  de  la  maison,  of  the  house ; 

I'enfant  {for  le  enfant),  the  child ;  un  banc,  a  bench  ; 

I'homme  {for  le  homme),  the  man  ;  un  jardin,  a  garden  ; 

a,  at,  to  ;  une  porte,  a  door  ;  a  gate  ; 

a  I'arbre,  at  the  tree ;  la-bas,  yonder. 


7.  Lie  P^re,  la  Mh^e  et  VEnfant,     {Father.  Mother,  and  Child.i 

Je  vois  un  homme,  une  femme  et  un  enfant. 

I         see        a  man,  a  woman       and     a  child. 

L'  enfant  a  une  orange. 

The        child       has      an  orange. 

L'  homme  est  le  pere  de  V  enfant. 

The  man  is      the      father     of     the       child. 

La  femme  est  la  mere  de  V  enfant. 

The       woman         is      the    mother       of    the       child. 

La  femme  est  a  la  porte  de  la  maison. 

The       woman         Is      at  the       door         of     the         house. 

Voila  un  banc  sous  1'  arbre. 

There  is       a        bench      under    the       tree. 

Je  vois  un  jardin  la-bas. 

I  8e*»         a  i^ardea        yonder. 


THE  GARDEN-  OA  IB,  23 


8.  Vocabulary. 

du  {for  de  le),  of  the ;  il  va,  lie  goes  ;  elle  va,  she  goes  ; 

du  jardin,  of  the  garden ;  va-t-il  ?  does  he  go  ?  is  he  going  ? 

au  {for  a  le),  at  the ;  to  the  ;  va-t-elle?  does  she  go?  isshegoing'^ 

au  jardin,  to  tlie  garden  ;  dans,  in,  into  ; 

U,  he,  it  ;  elle,  she,  it ;  un  cabas,  a  satchel,  a  bag ; 

il  a,  he  has ;  elle  a,  she  has ;  la  main,  the  hand  ; 

a-t^il  ?  has  he  ?  a  t-elle  ?  has  she  ?  a  la  main,  at  the  hand,  in  the  hand 


9»  La  Porte  du  JTardin,     (The  Oateoftlie  Garden.) 

Je  vols  la  poite  du  jardin. 

I    see   the   gate  of  the   garden. 

L'  homme  a  la  clef  du  jardin. 

The         man        has  the     key    of  the     garden. 

II     va     au    jardin. 

He    Is  going  to  the        garden. 

Voila    r  enfant    au    bane. 

There  is    the        child         at  the      bench. 

A-t-il  une  orange? 

Has      it       an  orange? 

La  femme  a  un  cabas  a  la  main. 

The       woman     has     a        satchel     in    her     hand. 

Ou    va-t-elle? 

Where       is      she  going  ? 

Elle     va     dans  la  maison. 

She       is  going       Into      the        house. 


10,  mon,  ma,  my. 


mon  pere,  my  father  ;  ma  mere,  my  mother : 

mon  frere,  my  brother  ;  ma  soeur,  my  sister  ; 

men  oncle,  my  uncle  ;  ma  tante,  my  aunt  ; 

mon  cousin,  my  (boy)  cousin  ;  ma  cousinej  my  (girl)  cousin. 


24 


BEITRTS  BOAT. 


11,  Vocabulary^ 

j'ai  iforie  ai),  I  have  ;  il  s'appelle'  Henri,  he  is  called  Henry; 

un  bateau,  a  boat ;  est-ce  que  (qu'),  is  it  that ; 

une  poupee,  a  doll ;  est-ce  qu'il  va  ?'^  does  he  go  ?  is  he  going  1 

l'eau(/or  la  eau),  the  water;  bien,  well;  tres,  very;  tres-bien,  very  well. 


12.  Le  Bateau  d'Henri,    {Hent'y's  Boat.) 

J'ai  un  frere  et  une  soeur. 


I  have 


brother     and 


sister. 


Mon  frere  s'appelle  Henri. 

My        brother  is  called  Henry. 

Ma  soeur  s'appelle  Julie. 

My     sister  is  called  Julia. 

Henri  a  un  bateau  ;  Julie  a  une  poupee. 

Henry     has     a  ' 


boat 


Julia      has      a 


doll. 


Le  bateau  d'  Henri  est  dans  V  eau. 

The         boat  of        Henry        is  in       the   water. 

Est-ce  qu'il  va  bien? 

Does  it      go       well? 

II  va   tres-bien. 

It     goes       very  well. 


'  II  s'appelle  {for  il  se  appelle),  literally,  he  calls  . 

2  Est-ce  qu'il  va  ?  means  the  same  as  va-t-il  ?  {See  Vocabulary,  p.  23.) 


VNCLE  AND  A  UNT.  )ib 

13,  Vocabulary, 

ton,  ta,  tliy  ;  (your) ;  il  joue,  lie  plays,  lie  is  playing  ; 

son,  sa,  his,  her,  its  ;  Joue-t-il  ?  )  is  he  playing  ?  o-; 

son  oncle,  his  uucle,  her  uncle  ;  est-ce  qu'il  joue  ? )  does  he  play  V 
sa  tante,  his  aunt,  her  aunt ;        Julie  joue-t-elle  ?         i  is  Julia  play, 
je  suis,  1  am  ;  est-ce  que  Julie  joue  ? )     ing  ? 

\e  vais,  I  go,  I  am  going ;  avec,  with. 


14,  Mon  Oncle  et  ma  Tante.    {My  Vncie  and  Aunt) 
Je  vols  ton  pfere  et  ta  mere  la-bas. 

I         see       your     father    and    —    mother      yonder. 

Ton  p^re  est  mon  oncle. 

Your      father       is       my         uncle. 

Ta  m^Te  est  ma  tante. 

Your    mother       is         my      aunt. 

Je  suis  ton  cousin. 

I       am        your       cousin. 

Julie  est  ma  cousine. 

Julia        is      my        cousin, 

Voila  Henri  a  Feau  ;  joue-t-il  avec  son  bateau? 

There  is       Henry     at  the  water ;  is  he  playing      with         his  boat? 


Est-ce  que  Julie  joue  avec  sa  poupee  ; 


Does  Julia      play       with     her  doll? 

Je  vais  a  la  maison. 

I    am  going  to    the       house   (home). 

C^  estbien. 

That      is      well. 


15.  petitf  petite^  small,  little. 

un  petit  de,  a  small  thimble;  grand,  grande,  large  tall; 

one  petite  clefj  a  small  key;  joli,  jolie,  pretty  ; 

bon,  bonne,  good. 
2 


THE  DOG  TURCO. 


un  chien,  a  dog 
nn  chat,  a  cat  : 


16*  Vocabulary, 


un  cheval,  a  horse 
une  vache,  a  cow. 


17.  Le  Chien  Tiirco,    (The  Dog  Turco.) 

Je  vois  un  grand  chien  ;  c'est  un  bon  chien. 

I       Bee        a         large  dog;  it  is        a      good       dog. 

II  s'appelle  Turco. 

It        is  called  Turco. 

Voila  une  grande  vache  ;  c'est  une  bonne  yache. 

There  is       a  large  cow ;  it  is         a  good  cow. 

Jilie  a  un  petit  chat. 

;^ulia     has     a        little        cat       {kitten). 

Son  petit  chat  est  tres-joli. 

Her  kitten  Is        very  pretty. 

Julie  est  ma  petite  cousine. 

Julia        is      my       little  cousin. 

J'ai  un  bon  petit  cheval. 

I  have      a       good       little  norse. 

Mon  petit  cheval  va  tres-bien. 

My         little         horse        goes       very  well. 


THE  FRIENDS.  27 

18,  Vocabulary, 

un  garqon,  a  boy  ;  tu  as,  thou  hast  {you  Imve)  ; 

une  fille,  a  girl  ;  qu'as-tu  ?  what  hast  thou  ? 

un  ami,  a  friend  {boi/)  ;  tu  vas,  thou  goest  (you  go) ; 

une  amie,  a  friend  (girl) ;  Ou  vas-tu  ?  where  dost  thou  go  1 

que  (qu')  ?  what  ?  tu  vols,  thou  seest  {you  see). 


19    Les  Amis,     {The  Friends.) 

Je  vols  un  gcargou  et  une  fille. 

I        Bee       a  boy        and     a         girl. 

C'est  un  tr^-bon  garpon. 

It  is       a         very  good  boy, 

II  est  mon  ami. 

He     is         ray      friend. 

Sa  soeur  est  une  bonne  fille. 

His     sister       is        a  good         girl. 

Elle  est  Tamie  de  ma  soeur. 

She       is     the  friend    of      my      sister. 

Qu'as-tu  ?  or  Qu'est-ce  que  tu  as  ? 

Wtiat  have  you  ? 

J'ai  mon  petit  bateau. 

I  have       my         little  boat. 

Ou   vas-tu? 

Where  are  you  going  ? 

Je  vais    a  Feau  avee  Turco. 

I    am  going  to  the  water     with        Turco. 


20,  ce,  cet,  cette^  this,  that. 

ce  gar90n,  this  lx)y,  that  boy  •      cet  homme,  this  man,  that  man ; 
cet  enfant,  this  cliill,  that  child;  cette  femme,  this  woman,  that  woman 


2fi 


THE  WALK. 


21,  Vocabulary, 

un  monsieur,  a  gentleman  ;  tu  es,  thou  art  {you  are) ;  es-tu  ?  art  thou  t 

une  dame,  a  lady  ;  je  connais,  I  know  ; 

sa  femme,  his  wife ;  connaia-tu  ?  knowest  thou  ?  {do  you  know  f) 

son  fils,  his  son  ;  cette  demoiselle,  that  young  lady  ; 

sa  fille,  his  daughter  ;  oui,  yes. 


22,  La  Promenade,    (The  Walk.) 

Je  vais  a  la  promenade  avec  mon  oncle. 

J  am  going    for     a  walk  with        my        uncle. 

Connais-tu  ce  monsieur  ? 

Do  you  know       that     gentleman  ? 

Oui,  mon  oncle  ;  c'est  monsieur  Lambert. 

Yea  uncle;  it  is  Mister  Lambert. 

Cette  dame  est  sa  femme. 

That         lady         is     his       wife. 

Cette  demoiselle  est  sa  fille. 

That  young  lady  is     his  daughter. 

Cet  enfant  est  son  fils  Henri. 

That  child  is       his     son       Henry. 

Henri,  es-tu  mon   ami  ? 

Henry,        are  you      my        firiend? 


THE  UNCLE  AND  THE  LITTLE  ONE.  29 

;^3.   Vocabulary, 

non,  no;  ne-pas,  not. 

je  n'ai  pas,  I  have  not ;  fatigue,  fatiguee,  tired ; 

tu  n'as  pas,  thou  hast  not ;  malade,  sick  ; 

il  n'a  pas,  he  lias  not ;  le  (1'),  him,  it ; 

n'a-t-il  pas  ?  has  he  not  ?  la  (1'),  her,  it ; 

je  ne  suia  pas,  I  am  not ;  je  le  vois,  I  gee  him  ; 

tu  n'es  pas,  thou  art  not ;  je  ne  la  connais  pas,  I  do  not  know  he:^ 


24,  L^Oncle  et  la  Petite,      {The  Unde  and  the  Little  One.) 

Tu  n'es  pas  fatiguee,  Marie  ? 

You     are       not  tired,  Mary? 

Non,  mon  oncle  ;  je  ne  suis  pas  fatiguee. 

No,  uncle;  I  am        not  tired. 

Ou  est  ton  amie  Anne  ?     Je  ne  la  vois  pas 

Where     is       yoar    friend       Anne?  I  her     see       not 

Elle  n'est  pas  ici  ;  elle  est  malade. 

She  is         not     here  ;       ehe       Is  sick. 

Connais-tu  cethomme? 

Do  you  know  that  man  ? 

Oui,  je  le  connais  bien. 

Yes,       I    him       know  well. 

Ou  est  ton  cabas,  ma  petite? 

Where      is      your        bag,  my  little  one? 

Je  I'ai  ;  le  voici. 

I     it  have  ;      it  here  is    (here  it  Is). 


2S0  nous,  we;  vous,  you;  its,  elles,  they. 

nous  avons,  we  have;  nous  sommes,  we  are; 

vous  avez,  you  have  ;  vous  Mes,  you  are  ; 

lis  ont,      ]  ^-i    _y ils  sent, 

elles  01 


;^[  they  have.  Se.°°o''nt.  [ '''"^ 


30 


TEE  NURSERY. 


26,  Vocabulary, 

les,  the;  them;  des,  of  the;  aux,  to  the;  le  livre,  the  book  ; 

les  enfants,  the  children ;  le  cahier,  the  copy-booK 

je  les  vois,  I  see  them  ;  la  plume,  the  pen  ; 

des  enfants,  of  the  children  ;  lu,  read  ; 

aux  enfants,  to  the  children  ;  6crit,  written. 


27*  La  Chambre  des  Enfants.    (The  Nursery,) 

Ou  etes-vous  ? 

Where     are         you  ? 

Nous  sommes  dans  la  chambre  des  enfants. 

We  are  in       the  nursery. 

Ou  sont  les  livres  ?     les  avez-vous  ? 

Where  are      the       books  ?  them     have        you  ?       (have  you  them  ?) 

lis  sont  ici  ;  je  les  ai. 

They      are      here ;      I     thera  have  (I  have  them). 

Les  plumes  sont  sur  la  table,  avec  les  cahiers. 

The  pens          are        on      the     table,        with       the   copy-books. 

Nous  avons  ^crit. 

We  have        written. 

lis  ont  tres-bien  lu. 

They  have        very  well       read    {read  very  well). 


STUD  TIN O.  gl 

28,  Vocabulary* 

mes,  my ;  tes,  thy ;    ces,  these,  those  ;  su,  known; 

ses,  his,  her,  its  ;       le  crayon,  the  pencil ;  vu,  seen  ; 

notre,  nos,  our  ;        la  le9on,  the  lesson  ;  perdu,  lost ; 

votre,  vos,  your  ;     je  sais,  I  know  ;  trouve,  found  ; 

leur,  leurs,  their  ;    sais-tu?  knowest  thou  ?  {do  you  apporte,  brought 

know  f) 


29,  A  VEtude,     {Sludybvg.) 

Les  eiifants  sorit  a  I  etude. 

The      children  are  studying. 

J'ai  perdu  rues  crayous. 

I  have         lost  my  pencils. 

Ton  fr^re  a  trouve  tes  crayons. 

Your     brother    has      found         your        pencils. 

Elise  n'a  pas  apporte  ses  livres. 

Eliza  has  not        broti<,'ht        her      books. 

Mes  amis,  j'ai  vu  votre  onele  et  vos  cousins. 

My    friends,    I  have   seen     your         uncle       and    your        cousins. 

Anne  a  vu  notre  oncle  et  nos  cousins. 

Ann       has  seen     our  uncle     and    our       cousins. 

Sais-tu  la  lepon  ? 

Do  you  know  the       lesson  ? 

Je  ne  la  sais  pas  bien. 

I  it  know      not       well. 

Ces  enfants  n'ont  pas  su    leurs  legons. 

These  children  have      not   known     their        lessons. 


30.  quelf  quelle ;  quels,  quelles,  what,  which. 

quel  jour  ?  what  day  ?  quelle  heure  ?  what  hour  ? 

quel  jour  est-ce  ?  what  day  is  it  ?  quelle  heure  est-il  ?  what  hour  is  it  T 


32 


TO  SCHOOL. 


un  jour,  a  day  ; 
aiyourd'hui,  to-day 
lundi,  Monday ; 


31,  Vocabulary. 

I'ecole  {for  la  ecole),  the  school ; 
une  heure,  an  hour ;  one  o'clock  ; 
neuf  heures,  nine  hours ;  nine  o'clock 


3, 


4,  5, 


7,        8,        9,       10. 


un,  une,  deux,  trois,  quatre,  cinq,    six,  sept,  huit,  neuf,  dix. 


32,  A  V Ecole,     {ToSckod.)^  y 

Quel  jour  est-ce  aujourd'hui  ? 

What       day  is  it  to-day. 

O^est  aujourd'hui  lundi. 

It  is  to-day  Monday. 

II  est  neuf  heures. 

It      is         nine         o'cloclc. 


Je  vais  a 

lain  going     to 


"ecole. 

school. 


Quels  livres  as-tula? 

What        books     have  you  there  ? 

Ce  sont  mes  livres. 

They     are        my         books. 

Quelles  lemons  avons-nous  ? 

What  leBsons  have  we  ? 


THE  DA  YJS  OF  THE  WEEK.  33 

33,  Vocabulary, 

dimanche,  Sunday  ;  combien  (de),  how  much,  how  many  ; 

lundi,  Monday  ;  une  le9on  de  musique,  a  music  lesson;- 

mardi,  Tuesday  ;  I'eglise  {for  la  eglise),  the  church  ; 

mercredi,  Wednesday  ;  je  prends,  I  take ; 

jeudi,  Tliursday  ;  je  vais  voir,  I  go  to  see ; 

vendredi,  Friday  ;  je  re9ois,  I  receive ; 

samedi,  Saturday  ;  je  sors,  I  go  out. 


34:,  Les  Jours  de  la  Seinaine.    {The  Days  of  the  Week.) 
Combien  de  jours  a  une  seinaine  ? 

How  many  days      has       a  week? 

Une  semaine  a  se^  jours. 

A  week  has   seven       days. 

Le  dimanche  je  vais  a  Teglise. 

(On)  Sunday  I         go      to      church. 

Le  lundi  je  vais  a  I'ecole. 

Monday         I        go      to     school. 

Le  mardi  je  prends  une  le^on  de  musique. 

Tuesday         I  take  a  music  lesson. 

Le  mercredi  je  vais  voir  ma  tante. 

Wednesday  I         go      to  see     my       aunt. 

Le  jeudi  je  rec^ois  mes  amis. 

Thurs<day        I      receive        my      friends. 

Le  vendredi  je  sors  avec  maman. 

Friday  I     go  out     with        mamma. 

Le  sam^jdi  je  vais  a  la  promenade  avec  papa= 

Saturday  1         go      for     a  walk  with        papa. 


/7 


55,  je  te  vois^  I  see  you. 
me  (m'),  me,  to  me ;  nous,  us,  to  us  ; 

te  (f),  thee,  to  thee  (you) ;  vous,  you,  to  you. 

2* 


6^ 


m  THE  PARLOR. 


36,  Vocabulary, 

boiyour,  good  day;  good  morn-     ete,  been;  achete,  bought; 

ing;  dit,  said;  told; 

ce  matin,  this  morning;  quelque    chose,    something,    any- 

une  rue,  a  street;  thing; 

un  pont,  a  bridge;  cela,  that;  le,  it,  so; 

un  magasin,  a  store;  n'est-ce  pas  ?  is  it  not? 


37.  Alt  Salon,     (in  the  Parlor.) 

Borijour,  monsieur  Lambert.  Je  vous  ai  vu  ce  matin. 

Good  day,  Mister  Lambert.  I        you    have  seen  this  morning. 

Bonjour,  Marie.     Oli  m^as-tu  vu  ? 

Good  day,        Mary.  Where  me  have  you    seen  ? 

Je  vous  ai  vu  dans  la  rue  du  Pont. 

I        you      have  seen         in  Bridge  street. 


in 

J'ai  ^t^  dans  les  magasins  avec  mon  oncle. 

stores  with        my 


I  have  been 


in 


the 


uncle. 


Je  le  sais.   II  t'a  achete  quelque  chose  ;  n'est-ce  pas  ? 

I      it  know.      He  you  has  bought  something ;  is  it  not  ? 

Qui  vous  a  dit  cela  ? 

Who     to  you  has  told      that  ? 

Tu  Fas  dit  aux  enfants,  et  ils  me  Font  dit. 

Vou     it  have  told     to  the       children,        and  Uiey      me     it  have      told. 


TEE  PRESENT,  35 

38.  Vocabulary, 

an  cadeau,  a  present;  parler,  to  speak; 

une  bague,  a  finger-ring;  fran9ais,  French; 

un  porte-crayon,  a  pencil-case;       il  faut,  it  is  necessary,  must*, 

lui,  to  hira,  to  her;  leur,  to  them;   dire,  to  say;  to  tell; 

fait,  iriade,  done;  rien  (ne),  nothing,  not  any  thing; 

je  crois  que  (qu'),  I  believe  that;    pour,  for;  aussi,  also,  too. 


39.  Le  Cadeau,    {Tiit  Frteent.) 

Charles,  mon  oiicle  m'a  fait  un  cadeau. 

Charles,  uncle  to  me  has  made     a        present. 

II  t'a  acliete  une  bague.     Elise  me  I'a  dit. 

fle  to  you  has  bought      a  ring.  Eliza  to  me    it  has  told. 

II  ne  faut  rien  dire  a  Henriette. 

You  must  not  say  anything    to        Henrietta. 

II  ne  lui  a  rien  achet^. 

He  for  her  has  nothing     bought. 

Pour  qui  a-t-il  achet^  le  joli  porte-crayon? 

For       whom    has  he       bought      the  pretty         pencil-case  f 

Je  crois  qu'il  I'a  acbet6  pour  ton  frbre. 

I      believe     that  he  it  has    bought         for         your     brother. 

Levoilk,  et  tasoeur  Anne  aussi.    Je  vais  leur  parler. 

There  he  is,    and  your  sister        Ann         too.  I  am  going  to  them  to  speak. 

II  faut  parler  franpais. 

Tou  mast       speak  French. 


40,  du^  de  la^  de  l\  des,  some  or  any, 

du  pain,  some  bread;  de  I'eau,  some  water; 

de  la  viandei  some  meat;  des  oranges,  some  oranges. 


36 


AT  BREAKFAST. 


dl.  Vocabulary, 

j'ai  faim,  {I have  hunger)  I  am  liungry ;  oui,  s'il  vous  plait,  yes,  if  you  please. 
j'ai  soif,  {I  have  thirst)  I  am  thirsty  ;  non,  je  vous  remercie,  no,  I  thank 
veux-tu  ?    wilt   thou  ?  (will  you      you  ;  [est ; 

have) ;  je  bois,  I  drink ;  tubois,  thou  drink 

du  beurre,  butter ;    du  lait,  milk  ;  j'aime  le  lait,  I  like  milk. 


42,  A  Dejeuner,      {At  Breakfast.) 

Bonjour,  papa  et  maman  ;  j'ai  faim. 

Good  morning,    papa     and     mamma ;  I  am    hungry. 

Moi  aussi,  maman  ;  j'ai  faim  et  soif. 

I  too,  mamma;        I  am    hungi-y   and   thirsty. 

Voila  du  pain  et  du  beurre,  raes  enfants. 

There  is     —      bread   and  —  butter,        my  children. 

Yeux-tu  de  la   viande,  Charles? 

Will  you  have     some  meat,  Charles^ 

Non,  maman  ;  je  vous  remercie. 

No,       mamma,  I  you  thank.  [lihanTc  you.) 

Bois-tu  du  lait,  Marie  ? 

Bo  you  drink    --     milk,  Mary  ? 

Non,  maman  ;  de  I'eau,  s'il  vous  plait. 

No,  mamma;  —     —water,        if  you      please. 

Je  n'aime  pas  l^ait. 

I       —  like  not    —    milk.    {J  do  not  like  milk.) 


AFTER  THE  MEAL.  87 

4:3,  Vocabulary. 

le  dejeuner,  the  break  fast ;  un  oeuf^  an  egg; 

dejeune,  breakfasted  ;  des  CBufs,  some  eggs; 

mange,  eaten  ;  bu,  drunk ; 

du  fruit,  some  fruit ;  eu,  had. 


44:.  Apr^S  le  Hepas.     (After  the  Meal.) 

J'ai  bien  dejeune. 

I  have      well       breakfasted. 

Qu'as-tu  mange  ? 

What  have  you       eaten  ? 

J^ai  mange  clu  pain  et  de  la  viande, 

I  have       eaten        —       bread   and    —    —         meat. 

J'ai  bn  de  Feau. 

I  have  drunk     —     —  water. 

Nous  avons  eu  des  oeufs. ' 

We  have        had    some      eggs. 

Le  petit  Henri  a  mang^  un  oeuf. 

^       Little       Henry      has      eaten         an       egg. 

Avez-vous  eu  du  fruit  ? 

Have        yoa      had  any     fruit? 

Nous  avons  eu  des  oranges. 

We  have      had       —        oranges. 

J^aime  les  oranges. 

I  like  —       oranges. 


m 


') 


45.  de  bon^  some  good ;  pas  de^  not  any. 

du  g4teau,  pome  cake  ;  un  couteau,  a  knife  ; 

de  bon  gateau,  some  good  cake  ;  pas  de  couteau,  no  knife  ; 

pas  de  gateau,  not  any  cake;  des  couteaux,  knives  ; 

pas  de  gateaux,  no  cakes  ;  de  bona  couteaux,  g(x)d  knives. 


68 


AT  A  PICNIC. 


4:6 »  Vocabulary, 


tme  pomme,  an  apple ; 

une  poire,  a  pear ; 

ae  la  gelee,  some  jelly  ; 


un  verre,  a  glass ;  une  tasse,  a  cup; 
une  corbeille,  a  basket ; 
nous  voulons,  we  will  ;  we  wish  ; 
goiter,  to  luncli. 


47.  En  JPiq^ue-Kique, 


(^At  a  Picnic.) 


'J  Nous  voulons  gouter  Jci  sous  les  arbres. 

We  will  lunch        here    under    the         trees. 


J'ai  apporte  de  bon  gateau  et  de  bonne  gelee. 

I  have      brought       some  good       cake         and  —  --  jelly. 

Charles  a  apporte  des  pommes  et  des  poires. 

Charles     has     brought  —  apples         and     —        pears. 


JtJ  n^ai  pas  de  couteau. 

I    —have   no       —         knife. 


Oil  sont  les  fourchettes  ? 

Where   are       the  forks? 


Nous  n'avons  pas  apporte  de  fourchettes. 

We       —     have  not         brought       any  forks. 


Qui  a  les  verres  et  les  tasses? 

Who  has    the      glasses      and    — 


cups  ?       H 


Marie  les  a  dans  sa  corbeillei' 

Mary       them  has       in       her         basket. 


i 


MV^'^^A 


A T  THE  BANq  UET.  39 

rf*.  Vocabulary^ 

du  sncre,  sugar;  chercher,  to  seek,  to  look  for; 

un  morcean,  a  piece;  Je  vais  chercher,  I  am  going  for; 

un  citron,  a  lemon ;  j'ai  ete  chercher,  I  have  been  for; 

one  cuillere,  a  spoon;  mais,  but; 

un  ruisseau,  a  brook;  pardon,  I  beg  your  pardon. 


4:9,  Au  Banquet,     (At  the  Banquet.) 

Veux-tu  un  morceau  de  gateau  avec  de  la  gel^e  ? 

I^ill  you  have       a  piece  of         cake  with      —     —      jelly? 

Oui ;  mais  je  n^ai  pas  de  verre. 

Yes ;         but        I    —  have  no      —        glass. 

Yoila  des  tasses  sur  le  banc. 

There  are       --        cups         on       the     bench. 

J'ai    bu    une  tasse  de  bon  lait. 

I  have   drunk        a  cup         of      good      milk. 

Vas-tu  chercher  de  I'eau? 

Are  you  going         for  —    —water? 

J'ai  ^t6  chercher  de  I'eau   au  ruisseau. 

I  have  been  for  —     —  water  at  the         brook. 

Avons-nous  du  sucre  et  des  citrons  ? 

Have  we         —     sugar       and     —       lemons? 

Oui ;  mais  nous  n'avons  pas  de  duiJl^res. 

Yes;        but  we      —     have  no       —         spoons.  ^ 

Pardon  ;     nous  avons  de  petites  cuill^res. 

I  beg  your  pardon ;        we  have     some       small  spoons. 


SO,  moi^  I,  me ;  h  tnoi^  to  me. 

moi,  I,  me;  nous,  we,  us; 

toi,  thou,  thee;  vous,  you; 

lui,  he,  him;  eux,  ) 

eUe,she,her;  eJles,  [  *^^y' *^^°^- 


40 


TBE  BANGE  ON  THE  SWAUB. 


HI,  Vocabulary, 

nous  allons,  we  are  going;  la  balle,  the  ball  {playtJdng) ; 

danser,  to  dance;  jouer,  to  play; 

dansfe,  danced;  jouer  a  la  balle,  to  play  at  ball-, 

I'herbe  {for  la  herbe),  tlie  grass;  souvent,  often;  viens,  come. 


52.  La  Danse  Slir  la  Pelouse.     (The  Dance  on  the  S ward.-) 

Nous  allons  danser  sur  Fherbe. 

We       are  going     to  dance      on    the    graes. 

Viens,  Caroline  ;  veux-tn  danser  avec  moi  ? 

Come,  Caroline;  will      you       dance  wifh        me? 

Voila  nion  cousin.     Je  vais  danser  avec  lui. 

There  is      my         cousin.  I  am  going     to  dance       with      him. 

Elle  ne  veut  pas  danser  avec  toi. 

She       —       will        not        dance         with      you. 

J'ai  souvent  dans^  avec  elle. 

I  have         often  danced       with        her. 

Nous  voulons  jouer  a  la  balle. 

We  will  play      at  —       ball. 

Viens  ;  veux-tu  jouer  avec  nous  ? 

Come;  will     yon      play        with  ns? 

Je  vais  jouer  avec  eux. 

I  am  going    to  play       with       them. 


THE  RETURN.  i\ 

5S-  Vocabulary, 

chez,  to,  07'  at,  the  house  of;  y,  there; 

chez  moi,  to,  or  at,  my  house;  ily  est,  he  is  there; 

chez  toi,  to,  or  a.t,  thy  house;  nous  y  aliens,  we  are  going  there 

chez  lui,  to,  or  at,  his  house;  vous   allez,  you  are  going; 

chez  elle,  to,  or  at,  her  house;  ils  vent,  they  go;  they  are  going; 

-ihez  mon  oncle,  at  my  uncle's;  retourner,  to  return;  to  go  back. 


S4.  Le  Metour.     {The  Return.) 

Nous  allons  retourner  cliez  nous. 

We       are  going         to  return  home. 

Je  vais  chez  moi. 

I  am  going        to    my  house. 

Tu  vas  chez   toi  ;   n'est-ce  pas? 

Ton  are  going     to    your  house  ;  —   are  you       not  ? 

Henri  va  chez   lui,     et  Jules  y  va  avec  lui- 

Henry     is  going  to  his  house,     and     Julius   there  goes     with      him. 

Julie    va    chez  sa  tante  ;  sa  m^re  y  est. 

Julia    is  going       to       her     aunt's ;      her  mother  there   is. 

Vous  allez  chez  vous  ;  c'est  bien. 

Yon     are  going       to      your  home ;   that  is     well. 

Nous  y  allons  avec  vous. 

We     there  are  going      with         yon. 

Nos  amis  y  vont  aussi. 

Our     friends  there     go  too. 


55,  en,  some  or  any  {of  it,  of  them). 

j'en  ai,  I  have  some;  il  Y  a,  there  is;  there  are; 

vous  en  avez,  you  have  some;  y  a-t-il  ?  is  there  ?  are  there  ? 

en  a-t-il  ?  has  he  any  ?  il  n'y  a  pas,  tliere  is  not; 

il  n'en  a  pas,  he  has  not  (any);  n'y  a-t-il  pas?   is  there  not? 


42 


AT  WORK. 


56,  Vocabulary, 

du  fil,  thread;  du  coton,  cotton;       blanc,  blanche,  white; 
du  fil  de  coton,  cotton  thread; 
de  la  sole,  silk; 


du  fil  de  sole,  silk  thread 


*oi.r,  noire,  black; 


du  fil  blanc,  white  thread; 

de  la  sole  blanche,  white  silk; 

je  fais,  I  do,  J  make; 

tu  fais,  thou  doest ;  thou  inakest 


57.  A  VOuvrage.     {At  Work.) 

Qu'est-ce  que  tu     fais  ? 

What    is      it      that    you  are  making  ? 

Je   fais   quelque  chose  de  joli. 

1  am  making  something  _     pretty. 

II  me  faut  du  fil  noir  ;  en  as-tu? 

I    want    some     thread      black;       any  have  you? 

J'en  ai.     II  y  en  a  dans  mon  cabas. 

I  some  have.  there  some  is       in  my  bag. 

II  y  en  a  du  noir  et  du  blanc. 

There  some  is     —     black  and    —       white. 

Y  a-t-il  du  fil  de  soie  ? 

Is  there        —thread   of       silk? 

II  y  en  a  de  sole  et  de  coton. 

There  some  i?     of       silk      and     of      cotton. 


THE  CAN  AH  Y  BIRDS.  43 

5S,  Vocabulary, 

an  serin,  a  canary  bird;  en  haut,  up-stairs; 

un  oiseau,  a  bird;  en  bas,  dovvu-stairs; 

una  cage,  a  cage;  quelqu'un,  somebody,  anybody; 

sorti,  sortie,  gone  out;  personne  (ne),  nobody,  not  anybody 


59,  Les  Serins.     {The  Canai-y  Birds.) 

Y  a-t-il  un  serin  dans  cette  cage  ? 

la  there   a  canary  bird   in    that    cage  i 

II  y  en  a  deux. 

There     —   are    two. 

Ma  tante  aime  les  oiseaux  ;  elle  en  a  cinq. 

My        aunt        likes       —  birds  ;  she       —       has  five. 

Elle  est  en  haut,  dans  sa  chambre. 

She        is       up-stairs,  in        her  room. 

Ma  mere  y  est  aussi. 

My      mother  there    is  too. 

Tes  soenrs  y  sont-elles  ? 

Your     sisters    there      are       they? 

Non  ;  el  les  nV  sont  pas. 

No ;  they     —there    are  not. 

Julie  est  en  has,  et  Marie  est  sortie. 

Jolia         is      down-stairs,  and      Mary        is  out. 

Y  a-t-il  quelqu'un  au  salon  ? 

Is  there  anybody         in  the     parlor? 

Non  ;  il  n'y  a  personne. 

No ;  there  is  nobody. 


60.  plus  grand,  taller  ;    a^isai  grand^  as  taU. 

pius  grand,  larger,  taUer;  aussi  grand,  as  large,  as  taU; 

plus  petit,  smaller;  pas  aussi  grand,  not  so  large; 

que,  than,  as. 


44 


UNDER  THE  TREES. 


6J,  Vocabulary, 

I'age,  tlie  age;  jeune,  young; 

quel  age  as-tu  ?  how  old  art  thou  ?  fort,  forte,  strong; 

j'ai  dix  ans,  I  am  ten  years  old;      plus  fort  que  lui,  stronger  than  he; 

age,  agee,  old,  aged;  aussi  fort  que  lui,  as  strong  as  he 


62.  Sous  les  Arbres.     {Under  the  Trees.) 

Charles,  es-tu  plus  age  que  ton  cousin? 

Charles,       are    you        older  than     your       cousin  ? 

Non  ;  je  suis  plus  jeune  que  lui. 

No ;  I       am  younger  than      he. 

Mais  il  est  aussi  grand  que  moi. 

Bat     he     is         as  tall  as  L 


^ 


Quel  tge  as-tu  ? 

How       old     are  you  ? 


J'ai  neuf  ans,  et  mon  cousin  en  a  dix. 

lam       nine      years,   and     my        cousin       —     is     ten. 

Es-tu  aussi  fort  que  lui  ? 

Are  you        as        strong     as       he? 

Oh  oui  ;  il  n'est  pas  aussi  fort  que  moi. 


Oh      yes;      he  —     is       not 


so       strong    as 


^Jcaj^ 


THE  RACE.  45 

63.   Vocabulary, 

je  peux,  I  can ;  tu  peux,  thou  canst;  j'etudie,  I  study,  I  anri  studying; 

courir,  to  run;  tu  studies,  thou  studiest; 

vite,  fast,  quick;  il  etudie,  ho  studies; 

beaucoup,  much,  many;  avance,  advanced; 

autant,  as  much,  as  many;  pourquoi,  why; 

pa»  autant,  not  bo  much;  parce  que.  because. 


64,J^a  Course.     {The  Race.) 

Peux-tu  courir  aussi  vite  que  lui? 

Can      you        run  as  fast        as       he? 

Je  |)eux  courir  plus  vite  que  lui. 

I        can  run  faster  than     he. 

Es-tu  aussi  avance   dans  tes  etudes  ? 

Are  yon     as  far       advanced  in       your      studies  ? 

Non  ;  il  est  plus  avanc^  que  moi. 

No ;        he      Is     farther    advanced      than       I. 

Pourquoi  est-il  plus  avance  que  toi  ? 

Why  is     he    farther      advanced       than     you? 

Farce  qu'il  etudie  plus  que  moi. 

Becauf<e        he      studies       more      than         I. 

N'^tudies-tu  pas  beaucoup  ? 

Do  you  not  Ptudy  much? 

Si  ;  mais  pas  autant  que  Charles. 

Yes ;        but        not     ^o  much        as  Charles. 


65.  mon^  my  ;  le  mien,  mine. 

le  mi'dn,  la  mienne,        )  le  notre,  la  notre, ) 

.         ,  .  V  mine-  ,        a  f  ours; 

les  miens,  les  mienney,  \  '  les  notres,  ) 

le  tien,  la  tienne,        )  le  votre,  la  v6tre, ) 

les  tiens,  les  tiennes,  \  *^"°«'  (2^^^*);  les  v6tres,  \  ^         ' 

le  sien,  la  sienne,       ;  le  leur,  la  leur, )  ^^^.^^ 

les  siens,  les  siennes,  f  ^^^'  "*^^^'  ^^^ '  les  leurs,  ) 


46 


MINE  AND  THINK 


66,  Vocabulary. 

un  mouchoir,  a  liandkercliief ;  laisse,  left; 
une  ombrelle,  a  parasol;  pris,  taken; 

des  gants,  gloves;  a  qui  est  ?  to  whom  belongs  ?  whose  is  1 


67.  Le  Mien  et  le  Tien,     {Mine  and  Thine.) 

A  qui    est  ce  mouchoir? 

To  whom     belongs  this     handkerchief  ? 

II  est  a  moi. 

It  belongs  to      me. 

Pardon  ;  e'est  le  mien.     Julie  a  pris  le  tien. 

I  beg  your  pardon  ;  it    is  mine. 


Julia    has     taken 


yours. 


Yoila,  le  sien,  sur  la  chaise. 

There  is    —      hers      upon    the      chair. 

Tu  as  mon  ombrelle  ;  Anne  a  la  tienne. 

You  have     my  parasol ;  Ann      has  yours. 

Elle  a  laiss^  la  sienne  en  haut. 

She    has      left  hers  up-stairs. 

A  qui  sont  ces  gants  ? 

To  whom  belong  these     gloves  ? 

Je  crois  que  ce  sont  les  miens. 

I     believe    that    they     are  mine. 


THE  NE  W  CLOTHES.  i1 


68,  Vocabulary, 

on  chapeau,  a  liat;  a  bounet;  beau,  bel, )  beautiful,  fin©, 

un  habit,  a  coat;      .  beUe,         )  liandsome; 

une  robe,  a  dress;  nouveau,  nouvel, ) 

une  cravate,  a  cravat;  nouvelle,  ) 

ies  souliers,  shoes;  vieux,  vieil, )     , , 

lea  bottines,  ladies'  boots;  vieille,  ) 


69 .  Les  Nouveaux  Habits,    (Th^  New  Clothes.) 

Ton  nouveau  chapeau  est  bean. 

Your  new  bonnet  is     beautiful. 

II  est  plus  beau  que  le  mien. 

It      is      more    beautiful  ttian  mine. 

Ce  nouvel  habit  est  beau  ;  c'est  un  tr^s-bel  habit  K^A^. 

This        new  coat         is       fine ;  it  is         a       very     fine      coat. 

Sa  nouvelle  robe  est  aussi  belle  que  la  tienne. 

Her  new  dre^s       is  as       beautiful     as  yours. 

Voila  de  belles  cravates  de  soie. 

There  are  some        fine  cravats  of      silk. 

A  qui  sont  ces  vieux  souliers? 

To  whom  belong  these       old  shoes  ? 

Vos  vieilles  bottines  sont  en  bas  avec  les  n6tres. 

Your  old  boots  are      down-stairs     with  oar&> 

lis  ont  une  belle  maison. 

They  have       a    handsome       house. 

La  v6tre  est  aussi  belle  que  la  leur. 

Yours       is        as        handsome       as         theirs. 


70,  eelui,  the  one ;  lequel,  which  one. 

celui,  celle,  tliat,  the  one;  lequel,  laqueUe,  whicli  one; 

ceux,  celles,  those;  lesquels,  lesquelleSj  which  ones. 


48 


THE  CHOICE. 


71*  Vocabulary. 

des  bas,  stockings;  le  plus,  the  most; 

de  la  laine,  wool;  il  plait,  it  pleases; 

meilleur,  meilleure,  better,  best;    tu  trouves,  thou  findestj 
mieux,  le  mieux,  better,  the  best;  neuf,  neuve,  new. 


72.  Le  Choioc.     (The  Choice.) 

Mon  chapeau  est  neuf ;  celui  de  Julie  est  vieux. 

My  bonnet  is        new;  that        of     Julia         is  old. 

Lequel  est  le  meilleur  ? 

Which  one      is     the  be?t  ? 

Ma  robe  est  de  sole  ;  celle  de  Marie  est  de  laine. 


My       dress 


of       silk ; 


that 


of 


Mary 


of       wool. 


Laquelle  te  plait  le  mieux  ? 

Which  one      to  you  pleases  —         best  ? 


Void  des  bas  de  coton,  et  voila  des  bas  de  laine 

Here  are     —   stocking^  of      cotton,    and  there  are       —  stockings  of      wool. 

Lesquels  veux-tu,  ceux  de  coton,  ou  ceux  de  laine  ? 

Which  ones     will  you  have,    those     of     cotton,       or      those     of      wool  ? 

Voici  mes  bagues,  et  voila  celles  de  Marie. 

Pere  are     my  rings,        and  there  are     those        of        Mary. 

Lesquelles  trouves-tu  les  plus  jolies  ? 

Which  one«  do  you  find         the  prettiest? 


THESE  ANL  TUOSE.  i& 

73.  Vocabulary. 

cet  homme-ci,  this  man  ;  cette  femme-ci,  this  woman  ; 

cet  homme-la,  that  man  ;  cette  femme-la,  that  woman  ; 

celui-ci,  this  one,  oelui  la,  that  one;  celle-ci,  this  one;  celle-la,  that  one 
ces  enfants-ci,  these  children  ;  ces  femmes-ci,  these  women  ; 

ces  enfants-la,  those  chiklren  ;         ces  femmes-la,  those  women  ; 
ceux-ci,  these ;  ceux-la,  those  ;       celles-ci,  these  ;  celles-la,  those  ; 


74.  CeUX^ci  et  ceux-la,     (,T/iem  and  Those.) 

Cet  habit-ci  est  a  moi ;  celui-la  est  a  Jules. 

This         coat         belongs  to      me  ;  that  one    belongs  to    Julius. 

J'aime  mieux  celui-ci  que  celui-la. 

I  like    I      better         this  one       than       that  one. 

Cette  robe-ci  est  de  soie  ;  celle-la  est  de  laine. 

This       dress      —     is       of       silk ;         that  one        is       of       wool. 

Celle-ci  me  plait  mieux  que  celle-la. 

This  one       to  me  pleases       better        than      that  one, 

Ces  bas-ci  sont  de  coton  ;  ceux-la  sont  de  laine. 

These   stockings       are       of     cotton ;         those     —       are        of       wool. 

Ceux-ci  sont  meilleurs  que  ceux-la. 

These      —       are  better  than       those.     — 

Ces  tasses-ci  sont  plus  jolies  que  celles-la. 

These       cnps        —     are  prettier  than       those.      — 

J^aime  mieux  celles-ci  que  celles-la. 

Hike  better  these     —     than       those.     — 


75.  une  foia,  once ;  deux  fois^  twice. 

autre,  other ;  quelque,  some  ;  quelques,  a  few  ; 

chaque,  each  ;  every  ;  tout,  touts,    )  ,    , 

mfeme,  same  ;  tous,  toutes,  \  ""^^^  ^^^^:^'  ^'^°^®' 

plusieurs,  several ;  *out  le  monde,  everybody; 

3 


50 


THE  SALUTATION. 


76,  Vocabulary, 

qui,  who,  which,  that ;  chaque  fois,  or  toutes  les  fois,  every 

que,  whom,  which,  that ;  time  ; 

dont,  of  whom,  of  which,  whose;  il  salue,  he  bows  to ;  salue,  bowed; 

a  qui,  to  whom ;  mort,  died;  dead ; 

tous  les  jours,  every  day  ;  il  est  mort,  he  died;  he  is  dead. 


77.   Le  Saint,     (The  Salutation.) 

Connais-tu  la  dame  qui  nous  a  salutes  ? 

Do  yon  know       the       lady        who        us      has     bowed  to  ? 

C'est  la  lu^me  dame  que  tu  as  vue  chez  nous. 

It  is     the      same  lady       whom  you  have     seen         at  our  house. 

C^est  elledont  I'enfant  est  mort  il  y  a  quelques  jours. 

ilt.is      -she  ofwliom   the  child     has       died         ago  a  few  days. 

"^oila  un  monsieur  qui  salne  tout  'le  monde. 

There  }s       a        gentlem3,n       who    hows  to  everybody. 

'C'est  un  monsieur  que  je  vois  tous  les  jours. 

That  is      a         gentleman      whom    I       see  every  day. 

C'est  celui  dont  mon  pere  a  parl^  a  table. 

It  is  he     of  whom     my       father  has   spoken    at     table. 

II  a  plusieurs  lilies  que  je  connais  toutes. 

He  has       several         daughters  whom     I  know  all. 

Te  les  vois  chaque  fois  que  je  vais  voir  ma  taiitQ. 

i    tliem     ,8ee  ^vejqy  time      that     J      .go  to      see       m^y  oput. 


AN  ACQ UAINTANCE.  51 

78,  Vocabulary, 

all6,  allee,  gone;  seul,  seule,  alone  ; 

arrive,  arrivee,  arrived ;  ensemble,  together  ; 

parti,  partie,  left ;  quand,  when  ; 

reste,  restee,  remained ;  hier,  yesterday ; 

venu,  venue,  come ;  la  matinee,  the  morning , 

je  viens,  I  come  ;  la  campagne,  the  country  ; 

il  vient,  he  comes ;  la  connaissance,  the  acquaintance^ 

de,  from  ;  of ;  mes  parents,  my  parents. 


79.  line  Connaissance,    {An  Acquaintance.) 
Voila  un  monsieur  qui  vIent  souvent  nous  voir. 

There  is     a        gentleman  who     comes  often  us        to  see. 

C'est  une  connaissance  de  mon  oncle. 

It  is         an  acquaintance  of       my         uncle. 

Je  Tai  vu  chez  mon  oncle  quand  j'y  suis  alle. 

I  him  have  seen      at  my       uncle's         when      I  there   have*     gone. 

lis  sont  venus  ensemble  de  Paris. 

They    have*       come  together         from      Paris. 

lis  sont  arrives  ici,  il  y  a  quelques  semaines. 

They   have*        arrived       here,       ago  a  few  weeks. 

Mes  parents  sont  partis  pour  la  campap:ne. 

My  parents        have*  left  for       the  country. 

Messoeurs  sont  sorties  ;  Charles  estseul  alamaison 

My      sisters      have*    gone  out ;  Charles         is     alone  at  —       home. 

Je  suis    reste  chez  moi  toute  la  matinee. 

I       have*    remained        at       home        all       the      morning. 


80,  quelqu^un^  somebody ;  personne,  nobody. 

auctm  (ne),  no  one  ;  on,  some  one,  people,  they  ; 

chacim,  every  one  ;  tout,  everything. 

*  Notice  that  the  French  say  in  these  phrases,  /  am,  we  are,  they  are,  etc.,  and 
the  English,  1  have,  toe  have,  they  have^  etc. 


52 


TEE  VISIT, 


81,  Vocabulary, 


une  personne,  a  person ; 

une  adresse,  an  address  ; 

un  eleve,  une  eleve,  a  scholar  ; 

une  classe,  a  class  ; 

une  question,  a  question  ; 


rfepondre  a,  to  answer ; 

manque,  missed ;   donner,  to  give  ; 


Sonne,  rung  ;  ouvert,  opened. 


82,  La  Visite.    {The  Tuit.) 

On  a  soring,       et  personne  n'a  ouvert  la  porte. 

Borne  one  has  rung  (the  bell  has  rung),  and  nobody  has      opened     the     door. 

Pardon  ;    la  fill  a-  y  est  all^e. 

I  beg  your  pardon ;  the      girl    there  has       gone. 

On  demande  quelqu'un  qui  ne  demeure  pas  ici. 

They         ask  for  somebody  who    —  lives  not     here. 

Je  connais  la  personne  dont  on  demande  Tadressec 

I  know       the  person        of  whom  they  ask  the    address. 

Aucun  eleve  n'a  su  repondre  a  cette  question. 

No  scholar    —  has  known  how  to  answer  —       this  question. 

On  ]'a  faite  a  chacun  ;  toute  la  classe  Fa  manquee. 

They  It  have  made  to      everyone;  all       the      class     it  has      missed. 


Je  sais  tout 

J.     know        all ; 


on     m'a      tout     dit. 

they  to  me  have  everything    tpld. 


ON  HORSEBACK  AND  IN  A  CARBIAOE.  ^         63 

83,  Vocabulary, 

an  voisin,  a  neighbor  ;  jusque,  jusqu'a,  till,  until  ; 

une  voiture,  a  carriage ;  demain,  to  morrow  ;  rester,  to  stay  j 

un  mois,  a  month  ;  cette  apres-midi,  this  afternoon ; 

depuis,  since  ;  ils  parlent,  they  speak  ; 

pendant,  during,  for  ;  ils  sortent,  they  go  out ; 

longtemps,  a  long  time  ;  ils  viennent,  they  come. 


84.  A  Cheval  et  en  Voiture.     {On  Horseback  and  in  a  Carriage, 

Nos  voisins  ont  et6  a  Paris. 

Our      neighbors    have    been  in      Paris. 

lis  y  ont  demeiire  pendant  lonfrtemps. 

They  there  have       resided  for  a  long  time. 

Leurs  enfants  parlent  franpais  aussi  bien  que  vous 

Their        children  speak  French  as         well        as       you. 

lis  demenrent  ici  depuis  quelques  mois. 

They    Wve  {have  lived)  here      since  a  few  months. 

lis  sortent  tons  les  jours  en  voiture. 

They      go  out  every  day  in  a       carriage    {drive  out). 

Nous  demeurons  ici  depuis  longtemps. 

We  live  (have  lived)   here  —  a  long  time. 

Mes  cousins  viennent  ici  cette  aprfes- midi. 

My        cousins  come  here     this  afternoon. 

lis  viennent  a  cheval,  et  vont  rester  jusqu'a  demain. 

They        come         on  horseback,  and  are  going  to  stay        until    —  to-morrow. 


85,  se  lever  {to  raise  one*8  self),  to  rise. 

Je  me  leve,  (raise  mi/self)  I  rise  ;  nous  nous  levons,  we  rise ; 

tu  te  leves,  thou  risest ;  vous  vous  levez,  you  rise  ; 

il  se  leva,  he  rises  ;  ils  se  levent,     i 

elle  se  leve,  she  rises  ;  eUes  se  levent,  J      ey  rise. 


54 


BUNRISm, 


86. 

je  me  couche,  I  go  to  bed  ; 
je  me  lave,  I  wash  myself  ; 
je  m'habille,  I  dress  myself  ; 
leve,  risen  ;  habille,  dressed 
il  s'est  leve,  lie  has  risen  ; 
rentrer,  to  come  in ; 


Vocabulary/, 

de  bonne  heure,  early  ;  tard,  late ; 

bientot,  soon  ;  deja,  already  ; 

encore,  still ;  pas  encore,  not  yet ; 

il  dort,  he  sleeps  ; 

maintenant,  now  ; 

le  lit,  the  bed  ;  au  lit,  in  bed. 


87.  Le  Lever  du  Soleil.    (SunHse.) 

Je  me  leve  au  lever  du  soleil.         / 

I  rise  at  sunrise. 

Henri  se  couche  de  bonue  lieure,  et  se  leve  tard. 

Henry       goes  to  bed  early  and       rises  late. 

II  est  encore  au  lit;  il  dort  jusqu'a  liuit  heures. 

He     is  still  in     bed ;    he    sleeps         till       —     eight       o'clock. 

Jules  est  leve,  mais  il  n'est  pas  encore  habille. 

Julius       is         up,  but       he    —    is       not  yet  dressed. 

Charles  s'est  lave  ;  il  s'habille  maintenant. 

Charles    has  washed  himself  ;  he      is  dressing  now. 

Mon  pere  est  leve  et   sorti    depuis  longtemps. 

My         father     is         up      and  (has)  gone  out  since         long  (long  since). 

II   va   bientot  rentrer  pour  dejeuner. 

He  is  going       soon  to  come  in         to  breakfast. 


THE  DEPARTURE.  55 

88*   Vocabulary/. 

j'avais,  I  had;  il  avait,  lie  had ;  avant,  devant,  before  ; 

j'etais,  I  was;  il  etait,  he  was  ;  apres,  after  ; 

j'ai  froid,  {1  have  cold)  I  am  cold ;  mal  a  la  tete,  a  headache  ; 

il  fait  froid,  it  (makes)  is  cold  ;  mal  a  la  gorge,  sore  throat ; 

il  faisait  froid,  it  was  cold  ;  mal  aux  dents,  toothache  ; 

je  dels,  1  must,  I  am  to  ;  descendre,  come  down  ; 

je  devais,  I  was  to ;  tout  de  suite,  immediately  ; 

iortir,  to  go  out ;  partir,  to  leave  ;  trop,  too ;  too  much. 


89,  Le  Depart.     (The  Departure.) 

Je  dois  rester  ici  ;  il  fait  trop  froid  pour  sortir. 

I      must     remain     here ;     it      is         too         cold  to         go  out. 

Je  me  suis  leve  ce  matin  avant  six  lieures. 

I       —       have      risen   this    morning      before       six        o'clock. 

Je  me  suis  lave  et  je  suis  descendu  tout  de  suite, 

I    myself  have  washed  and    I      have       come  down  immediately. 

Ma  soeur  6tait  deja   au  salon. 

My      sister       was     already  in  the    parlor.  , 

Elle  devait  partir  apr^s  le  dejeuner. 

She  was  to  leave        after       —        breakfast. 

La  voilure  etait  devant  la  porte. 

The      carriage         was  before       the      door. 

II  faisait  si  froid,  et  elle  avait  mal  a  la  gorge. 

It         was        so      cold,       and    she         had  a  sore  throat. 

Moi,  j'avais  mal  aux  dents. 

—  I  had  toothache. 

Ma  mere  avait  mal  a  la  tete. 

My     mother        had  a  headache. 


90.  avoir ^  to  have  ;  Hre^  to  he. 
nous  avions,  we  had  ;  nous  etions,  we  were  ; 

vous  aviez,  you  had  ;  vous  etiez,  you  were  ; 

ils  avaient,  they  had.  ils  etaient,  they  were. 


56 


ON  THE  ICE. 


91,  Vocabulary. 

le  plaisir,  the  pleasure  ;  passe,  passed  ;  bon  train,  at  a  good 

la  glace,  the  ice;  un  patin,  a  skate  ;  j'ai  chaud,  I  {have)  am  warm  ;  [rate  ; 
un  traineau,  a  sleigh  ;  nous  courions,  we  were  running  ; 

je  patine,  I  skate,  I  am  skating  ;    nous    nous    sommes    amuses,   we 
je  patinais,  I  was  skating ;  amused  o.  s. 


92,  Sur  la  Glace.    (On  me  ice.) 
Hier,  nous  avions  du  plaisir;  nous  etions  sur  la  glace. 

Yesterday,    we  had         —     pleasure;        we  were       on    the       ice. 

Nos  amis  y  etaient  avec  nous. 

Our      friends  there      were  with  us. 

lis  avaient  leurs  patins  ;  ils  patinaient. 

They         had  their  sliates ;        they      were  pijating. 

Yous  nous  avez  passes  ;  vous  etiez  en  traineau. 

You  us  have         passed ;  you        were     in  a  sleigh. 

Vous  alliez  bien  ;  vous  aviez  de  bons  chevaux. 

You     were  going     well;  you  had         —      good  horses. 

Nous  allions  bon  train  ;  mais  nous  avions  froid. 

We      went  along  at  a  good  rate;  but  we  were  coldc 

Nous  avions  chaud  ;  nous  courions  toujours. 

We  were  warm;         we        were  running     continually. 

Nous  nous  sommes  bien  amuses. 

We  ourselves  hav«  well         amused. 


THE  WEATHER.  57 

93,  Vocabulary, 

il  fait  mauvais  temps,  it  is  bad      le  trottoir,  the  sidewalk  ; 
weather  ;  couvert  de,  covered  with  ; 

il  pleut,  it  niiiKs;  il gele,  it  freezes;       la  nuit,  the  night ;  passee,  past; 
ilneige,  it  r^nows;  neige,  snowed;       le  bruit,  the  noise  ; 
la  neige,  the  snow  ;  la  cheminee,  the  chimney  ; 

la  pluie,  the  rain;  le  vent,  the  wind;  ce  qui,  ce  que,  {JtJiat  which)  what. 


94,  Le  Temps.     {The  Weather.) 

II  fait  mauvais  temps  ;  il  pleut. 

It       is  bad  weather;       it       rains. 

Hier  il  faisait  froid  ;  il  gelait. 

Yesterday  it       was  cold;         it        froze. 

La  nuit  passee  il  a  neige. 

The  night  past  (last  night)  it  has  snowed. 

Ce  matin  les  trottoirs  ^taient  converts  de  neige. 

This    morning      the       sidewalks  were  covered        with     snow. 

J'aime  mieux  la  neige  que  la  pluie. 

I      like  better       —      snow       than     —       rain. 

Savez-vous  ce  qui  fait  ce  bruit  ? 

Do  you  know  what     makes  that     noise  ? 

'  Oui ;  c^est  le  vent  dans  la  cheminee. 

Yes;      it    is     the     wind         in       the        chimney. 

II  ne  faut  pas  dire  a  Charles  ce  que  je  vous  ai  dit. 

You  must       not         tell     —       Charles  what         I     to  you  have  told. 


95,  shall  or  will. 


j'aurai,  I  shall  have  ;  je  porterai,  I  shall  or  will  carry ; 

tu  aiuras,  thou  wilt  (you  will)  have;  je  ferai,  I  shall  make  or  do  ; 

U  aura,  he  will  have  ;  je  verrai,  I  shall  see  ; 

je  serai,  1  shall  be  ;  j'irai,  I  shall  go  ; 
tu  seras,  thou  wilt  (you  will)  be  ;    je  viendrai,  I  shall  come ; 

il  sera,  he  will  be  ;  je  recevrai,  I  shall  receive. 
3* 


58 


MAMMA'^  BIRTHDAY. 


96,  Vocabulary, 

la  f^te,  the  festival;  the  birthday  ;  gros,  grosse,  large  ;  big ; 
Je  bouquet,  the  nosegay  ;  je  presenterai,  1  shall  preseji^ 

content,  contente,  pleased  ;  sourire,  to  smile  ; 

heureux,  heureuse,  happy  ;  au  nombre,  among  them. 


97.  La  JFSte  de  Matnan.     {Mamma's  Birthday.) 

J'auraidu  plaisir  demain;  ce  sera  la  f^te  de  maman. 

I  shall  have   —      pleasure    to-mon-ow;      it  will  be    —       mamma's  birthday. 

Je  ferai  un  gros  bouquet  que  je  lui  presenterai. 

I   will  make   a       large        nosegay       which    I    to  her       will  present. 

Je  le  porterai  a  sa  cliambre  quand  elle  sera  lev^e. 

I      it      shall  carry     to  her  room  when        she        has        risen. 

Elle  sera  bien  contente  quand  elle  me  verra. 

She     will  be     well  pleased  when        she      me       seeB  (will  see). 


Etje  serai  heureuse  quand  je  la  verrai  sourire. 

And    I    shall  be         happy  when        I     her  (shall)  see         smile. 

Je  n'irai  pas  a  T^cole  ;  je  resterai  a  la  maison. 

I     —   shall  not  go  to —   school;        I       shall  stay     ^t    —        home. 

Je  recevrai  mes  amis  ;  tu  seras    a4k  nombre. 

I     shall  receive       my      friends  ;     you   will  be    among  them. 

Tu  viendras  me  voir  avec  tes  parents. 

You      will  come        me     to  see      with       your        parents. 


THE  EVENING  PARTY.  59 


98,  Vocabulary* 

noug  aurons,  we  shall  have  ;  r^jouir,  to  gladden ; 

vous  aurez,  you  will  have  ;  pare,  paree  (de),  adorned  (with); 

ils  auront,  they  will  have  ;  un  bijou,  a  jewel  ; 

nous  serons,  we  shall  or  will  be  ;  une  fleur,  a  flower  ; 

vous  serez,  you  will  be ;  le  comble,  the  height ; 

ils  seront,  they  will  be ;  le  bonheur,  happiness ; 

feliciter,  to  congratulate  ;  le  coeur,  the  heart. 


99.  La  Soiree.     {The  Evening  Party.) 

Nous  aurons  du  nionde  chez  nous  le  soir. 

We       shall  have      —     company         at  our  house     in  the  evening. 

Tons  nos  amis  y  seront,  et  nous  danserons. 

All        our     friends  there    will  be,      and      we  shall  dance. 

Nous  nous  amuserons  toute  la  soiree. 

We     ourselves      shall  amuse  all        the    evening. 

Mes  cousins  y  viendront  avee  leurs  parents. 

My         cousins     there      will  come  with        their         parents. 

Vous  les  verrez  ;  vous  ferez  leur  connaissance. 

You     them     will  see ;  you    will  malje  their  acquaintance. 

On  f^licitera  maman  ;  on  lui  r^jouira  le  coeur. 

They  will  congratulate     mamma ;  they  to  her  will  gladden  the     heart. 

EUe  sera  paree  de  bijoux  et  de  fleurs. 

She     will  be     adorned    with       jewels     and    —     flowers. 

Et  moi,  je  serai  au  comble  du  bonheur. 

And  as  for  me,  I     shall  be  at  the     height         of      bappinesti. 


100,  aie,  Tuzve  {thou) ;  ayez^  have  {you) ;  ayons^  let  us  Tux/oe. 

sois,  soyez,  be  ;  fais,  faites,  do ;  make  ; 

va,  aUez,  go  ;  dis,  dites,  say  ;  tell ; 

viens,  venez,  come  ;  soyons,  let  us  be. 


60  T3E  GOVERNESS. 

101,  Vocahulai^y, 

ecoute,  ecoutez,  listen  ;  je  vous  prie,  I  beg  you  ; 

prends,  prenez,  take  ;  de  vous  depfecher,  to  make  haste , 

obeissons  (a),  let  us  obey ;  son  devoir,  liis  task  ; 

ayez  soin,  take  care  ;  une  chose,  a  thing ; 
prenez  garde,  take  care  ;  mind  ;      tranquille,  quiet ;  still ; 
on  louche,  some  one  touches  •, 


102,   La  Goiivernante.     {The  Governess.) 

Henri,  va  chercher  ton  livre  et  viens  dire  ta  le^on. 

Henry,       go  for  your     book     and    come  (and)  say  your    lesson. 

Fais  ton  devoir  avant  d'aller  jouer. 

Do      your         task  before    to  go  (you  go)    to  play. 

Marie,  allez  trouver  Charles,  s'il  vous  plait. 

Mary,  go  to  (find)  Charles,         if        you      please. 

Dites-lui  qu'on    le  demande. 

Tell     him  that  some  one       him  asks. 

Ne  lui  dites  pas  que  c  est  moi. 

' — -^  —     Him      tell         not      that       it  is  I. 

Faites-moi  le  plaisir  de  vous  d^p^cher. 

Do  me     the    pleasure     to       make  haste. 

Ne  me  faites  pas  attendre  ;  je  vous  eq  prie. 

—      Me       make       not  wait;  I        you      for  it     pray. 

Faites  attention  a  ce  que  je  dis. 

Make  (pay)       attention       to        what         I      say. 

Ecoutez-moi  bien,  et  restez   tranquilles. 

Listcjn  to       me       well,      and     remain  quiet       (keep  still). 

Ayez  soin  de  toutes  mes  choses,  voulez-vous  ? 

Take       care      of  all  my         things,  will  you? 

Prenez  garde  qu'on  n'y   touche. 

Take  care  (mind)        that  no  one  to  them  touches. 

Soyons  raisonnables,  et  obeissons  a  notre 

Let  us  be  reasonable,  and       let  us  obey     —       our 

gouvernante. 

governess.  '  [y 


PAET    SECOND. 


CHARLES  AND  MART—Conunued.  6^ 

103,  Vocabulary, 

qui  est-ce  que  ?  whom  ?  le  doigt,  the  finger ; 

qu'est-ce  qui?  what  "l  centre,  against;  le  mnar,  the  \yalls 

qu'est-ce  que  ?  what  V  le  tableau,  the  picture; 

qu'est-ce  que  c'est  ?  What  is  that  ?  le  milieu,  the  middle. 


104,  Charles  et  Marie,    (Voir  p.  20.) 

Ou  sont  Charles  et  Marie  ? 

Where      are         Charles       and      Mary  ? 

lis  sont  la,  a  la  table. 

They    are    there,  at  the      table. 

Qu^est-ce  qui  est  sur  la  table  ? 

What  is  (lies)    on     the     table? 

C'est  la  clef  de  Charles. 

It  is     the     key     of         Char?es. 

Qu^est-ce  que  Charles  a  au  doigt  ? 

What  has  Charles  at  the  finger? 

II  a  le    d^   de  Marie  au  doigt. 

He  has  the  thimble  of        Mary      at  the     finger. 

Qui  est-ce  que  vous  voyez  sur  le  sofa  ? 

Whom  doyoasee  on     the     sofa? 

Je  vois  papa  et  maman  sur  le  sofa. 

I        see        papa     and      mamma,        on    the     sofa. 

Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  la,  coutre  le  mur  ? 

What  —   is     there,    against      the       wall? 

C'est  un  petit  tableau. 

It  la        a       small  picture. 

Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a  au  milieu  de  la  chambre? 

What  is  there       in  the     middle       of    the  room  ? 

II  y  a  une  table  au  milieu  de  la  chnmbra 

There  is        a         table     in  the     middle       pf    the  jrofm' 


64  FATHER,  MOTHER  AND  CHILD— Continued. 


10^  Vocabulary, 

le  mari,  the  husband  ;  ouvrir,  to  open ;  ouvert,  open  ; 

la  femme,  the  wife  ;  pres  de,  near  ;  porter,  to  cany  ; 

une  fen^tre,  a  window  ;  a  cotfe  de,  next  to,  by  the  side  of. 


106 f  Le  r^re,  la  M^re  et  P Enfant,    (Voir  p.  22.) 

Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a  pres  du  banc,  sous  cet  arbre  ? 

What  is  there        near       the      bench,      under     that       tree  ? 

II  y  a  un  enfant,  qui  a  une  orange  a  la  main. 

There  is       a  child,        who  has    an         orange        in  the     hand. 

Qui  est  cet  homme,  qui   va  la-bas  ? 

Who      is      that         man,  who  is  going   yonder? 

C'est  le  pere  de  Tenfiint  ;  11    va    an  jardin. 

He  is    the     father     of   the    child ;  he  is  going  to  the    garden. 

Est-ce  que  la  porte  du  jardin  est  ouverte  ? 

Is       it      that    the      gate      of  the     garden        is  open? 

Non  ;  mais  il  a  la  clef;  il    va    Fouvrir. 

No ;  but      he  has  the     key ;      he  is  going  it    to  open. 

Et  cette  femme  que  voila  ;  qui  est-elle  ? 

And      that        woman        —         there ;         who     is       she  ? 

C'est  la  femme  de  Thomme,  et  la  mere  de  Tenfant. 

She  is    the        wife         of  the       man,         and  the    mother     of  the      child. 

Oil  va-t-elle  avec  son  cabas  ? 

Where  is  she  going      with       her       satchel  ? 

Elle    va    porter  son  cabas  dans  la  maison. 

She     is  going     to  carry        her     satchel       into     the       house. 

Qu'est-ce  qu'il  y  a  a  cote  de  la  porte  de  la  maison  ? 

What  is  there        next        to   the      door       of    the       house  ? 

II  y  a  une  petite  fenetre  a  cOte  de  la  porte. 

There  is        a  little        window  next        to    the      door. 


HENR  TS  BOA  T—  Continued,  65 

107'   Vocabulary, 

comment,  liow ;  une  corde,  a  rope; 

il  tient,  he  holds,  lie  ia  holding  ;  le  genou,  the  knee;  (les  genoux.) 

elle  regarde,  she  is  looking  at ;  le  pont,  the  bridge; 

attache,  ee,  attached;  par  ici,  this  way. 


108,  Le  Bateau  d* Henri,    (Voir  p.  24.) 

Qu'est-ce  que  c'est  que  ces  enfants-la ! 

—  Who       are         —     those  children? 

C'est  nion  fr^re  etmasoeur. 

They  are     ray     brother   and    —       sister. 

Comment  s'appellent-ils  ? 

How  are  they  called  ?     ( What  are  thei     ames  ?) 

Mon  fr^re  s'appelle  H.  .  .  et  ma  soeur  s'appel)    J. . . 

My    brother        is  called       Henry,     and   my      sister         is  called        Julia. 

Qu^est-ce  qu'  Henri  tient  a  la  main  ? 

What  does       Henry         hold    in  his       hand? 

C^est  une  corde,  qui  est  attachee  a  son  bateau. 

It  is         a  rope,      which    is        attached       to     hifl         boat. 

Et  Julie,  que  tient-elle  sur  ses  genoux  ? 

And    Jolia,       what  is  she  holding       on      her         icnees  ? 

Elle  tient  une  poup^e  sur  ses  genoux. 

She  is  holding      a  doll  on     her         knees. 

Qu'est-ce  qu'elle  fait  la  avec  sa  poup^e  ? 

What  is  she    doing  there    with     her  doll  ? 

Elle  joue  avec,  et  regarde  le  bateau  d'Henri. 

She  is  playing  with  it,    and     is  looking  at  the       boat         of     Henry. 

Qui  est-ce  que  tu  vois  la-bas,  sur  le  pont  ? 

Whom  do  you  gee      yonder,       on      the    bridge? 

C^est  mon  pere  et  ma  mere, qui  viennent  jiar  ici. 

—         My       father    and    —     mother,     who      are  coming        this     way. 


66  THE  DOG  TURCO— Continued. 

109,  Vocabulary, 

il  est  a,  }  ■       A  J®  monte  a  cheval,  I  go  on  horse 

U  appartient  a,  \  ^*  belongs  to;  ^^^^  .  dessus,  upon  it; 

je  monte,  I  go  up,  I  ascend  ;  je  monte  dessus,  I  ride  upon  it. 


110,  Le  Chien  Turco,    (Voir  p.  26.) 

Voila  un  beau  chien,  comment  s'appelle-t-il  ? 

There  is     a     beautiful      dog,  what  is  hi g  name? 

C'est  le  chien  de  mon  oncle  ;  il  s'appelle  Turco. 

That  is  the       dog        of        my         uncle;       his       name  is  Turco. 

A  qui  appartient  cetfe  belle  vache  ? 

To  whom  belongs  that     beautiful       cow  ? 

Cette  vache-la  appartient  a  ma  tante. 

That  cow        —  belongs  to    my       aunt. 

Qu^est-ce  que  Julie  tient  dans  ses  bras  ? 

What  is  Julia  holding        in  her       arms  ? 

C^est  un  petit  chat  que  ma  tante  lui  a  donn^. 

It  is        a  kitten  which     my        aunt   to  her  has    given. 

Yoila  un  joli  petit  cheval  ;  a  qui  appartient-il  ? 

There  is      a    pretty  "  little       horse;         to  whom         does  it  belong  ? 

C'est  mon  cheval  ;  je  monte  dessus  tons  les  jours. 

That  is      my  horse ;         I  ride  upon  it  every  day. 

Connais-tu  ce  petit  garpon  et  cette  petite  fille  la-bas! 

Do  you  know     that    little  boy        and     that  little       girl       yonder? 

Oui  ;  le  garqon  est  mon  ami  ;  il  vient  me  voir. 

Yes;     the         boy  is         my      friend;    he     comes      me     to  see. 

La  petite  fille  estsa  soeur;  elle  vient  joueravec  Julie. 

The      little         girl       is    his    sister;       she      comes     to  play      with      Jnlia. 

Nous  voulons  aller  a  Tean  avec  mon  petit  bntcniu 

We  will  go       to  the  water    with        my  little  bout- 


THE  WALK— Continued.  67 

111.  Vocabulary, 

toumons,  let  us  turn;  une  boite,  a  box  ; 

le  cote,  the  side;  on  vend,  they  sell; 

du  cote  de,  towards;  vendez-vous  ?  do  you  sell? 

s'arrdter,  to  stop;  cela  vaut,  that  is  worth; 

entrer  (dans),  to  enter,  to  go  in;  un  dollar,  a  dollar. 


112,  La  Promenade,    (Voir  p.  28.) 

II  fait  beau  temps  ce  matin,  allons  a  la  promenade. 

It      is         fine        weather  this  morning ;  let  us  go    for  a  walk. 

Tournons  du  cote  des  boulevards. 

Let  us  turn        towards        the  boulevards. 

Voila  un  monsieur  et  une  dame  que  tu  connais. 

There  is      a        gentleman       and     —  lady      whom  you        know. 

Ce  sent  nos  voisins  avec  leurs  enfants. 

They     are       our      neighbors      with       their         children. 

II  y  a  beaucoup  de  monde  devant  ce  magasin. 

There  are  many  people  before      that         s'tore. 

Nous  voulons  y  entrer  et  voir  ce  qu'on  y  vend. 

We  will       (in)  it    enter       and      see         what     they  there    sell. 

Qu^est-ce  qu'il  y  a  dans  ces  jolies  boites-la? 

What  is  in      those     pretty  boxes? 

II  y  a  des  mouclioirs  de  poche  dedans. 

There  are      —  pocket-handkerchiefs  in  them. 

Yoila  un   bel  eventail  ;  combien  le  vendez-vous? 

There  is      a   handsome         fan  ;  how  it  do  you  sell  ? 

Get  Eventail  vaut  trois  dollars  avec  la  boite. 

This  fan  is  worth    three        dollars         with   the       box. 

S'il  te  plait,  Marie,  je  te  Tachfeterai. 

If  it  to  you  pleases,      Mary,         I  to  you  it       will  buy, 

Yous  etes  bieii  bon,  mon  oncle  ;  je  vous  reraercie 

Tea        are       very     kind,       —        uncle;        I       you 

beaucoup. 

very  much. 


68  THE  NURSERY— Continued. 

113,  Vocabulary, 

une  histoire,  a  history;  a  story;  reussi,  succeeded; 

un  dessin,  a  drawing;  tacher,  to  try,  to  endeavor; 

une  page,  a  page;  a  I'avenir,  in  the  future; 

I'encre  (/or  la  encre),  the  ink;  d'abord,  first;  alors,  then; 

epais,  epaisse,  thick;  par  coeur,  by  heart. 


114:,  JLa  Chambre  des  Enfants,    (Voir  p.  30.) 

Nous  avons  fini  nos  devoirs  pour  demain. 

We  have   finished  our         tasks  for        to-morrow. 

Voulez-vous  nous  racoiiter  une  histoire  ? 

Will  you        to  us  relate  a  story  ? 

II  faut  d'abord  voir  ce  que  vous  avez  fait. 

I      must  first  see  what  you       have      done. 

Moi,  j'ai  fait  un  dessin  ;  le  voici. 

—      I  have  made     a       drawing ;        it  here  is    {here  it  is). 

Un  eheval ;  c^'est  bien  fait  ;  j'en  suis  contente. 

A  horse ;         that  is       well      done ;       I  with  it  am         pleased. 

Et  vous,  Marie,  avez-vous  ^crit  votre  pa^e  ? 

And     you,  Mary,         have        you      written       your         page? 

J'ai  fiiii,  mais  je  nai  pas  bien  reussi. 

I  have  finished,     but        I     —  have  not       well      succeeded. 

L'encre  n'est  pas  bonne  ;  elle  est  trop  epaisse. 

The     ink       —    is       not  good ;  it        is        too  thick. 

II  faut  tacher  de  mieux  faire  a  I'avenir. 

You    must  try  to        better  do       in  the    future. 

Anne,  avez-vous  etudie  votre  lepon  ? 

Ann,  have        you        studied        your         lesson? 

Oui,  mademoiselle,  je  la  sais  par  coeur. 

Yes,  miss,  I     it     know     by        heart. 

Alors  je  vais  vous  lire  une  belle  histoire. 

Then      I  am  going  to  you   to  read     a        pretty  atory. 


TO  SCHOOL— Continued.  6d 

115,  Vocabulary, 

revenez-vous  ?  do  you  return  ?  le  temps,  the  time;  the  weather; 

je  reviens,  1  return;  come  back;  midi,  noon;  demi,  half; 

en,  from  there;  une  demi-heure,  half  an  hour; 

occupe,  occupied;  prenez-vous?  do  you  take? 


116,  A  VEcole.    (Voir  p.  82.) 

A  quelle  heure  allez-voiis  a  I'ecole? 

At      what  time  do  yon  go        to  —  school  f 

J'y  vais  a  neuf  beiires  du  matin. 

I  there     go      at     nine       o'clock    in  the  moruing. 

A  quelle  heure  en  revenez-vous  ? 

At       what  time  from  there     do  you  return  ? 

J'en    reviens  a  deux  heures  de  I'apres-midi. 

I  from  there      return        at       two         o'clock        in    the      afternoon. 

fites-vous  occupy  tout  le  temps  que  vous  y  Stes? 

Are         you         occupied        all      the       time  —         you     there      are? 

Nous  avons  une  demi-heure  de  r^cr^ation  a  midi. 

We  have  half  an  hour  recreation        at     noon. 

Combien  d'elfeves  y  a-t-il  dans  votre  classe  ? 

Bow  many     —  scholars      are  there        In  your  class? 

Je  erois  qu'il    y    en  a  quinze. 

I      believe     that     there  are  —  fifteen. 

Quels  jours  prenez-vous  votre  lepon  de  musique  ? 

(On)  what     days  do  you  take  your  music  lesson  ? 

Je  la  prends  le  Inndi  et  le  jeudi. 

I      it  take        —    Mondays  and—  Thursdays. 

Qu'est-ce  que  vous  faites  le  samedi  ? 

What  do  you         do        —     Saturdays  ? 

Je  ?ors  avec  mon  pero,  ou  je  vais  voir  mes  amis. 

I      go  out       with       my         father,       or      i       go       to  see        my        friends. 


70  IN  THE  PARLOB—CDntinueO. 

117 »  Vocabulary, 

jour  de  reception,  reception  day ;  indispose,  indisposed  ; 

charme  de,  glad  to;  une  emplette,  a  purchase  ; 

comment  se  porte. . .  ?  liow  is. . .  ?  rencontre,  met; 

je  me  porte  bien,  I  am  well;  la  bonte,  the  kindness; 

la  sante,  health;  aupres  de,  near;  with. 


118.  Au  Salon.    (Voir  p.  34.) 

Yoici  jeudi,  Marie,  votre  jourde  reception. 

This  is   Thursday,      Mary,  your  reception  day. 

Monsieur  Lambert,  je  suis  charmee  de  vous  voir. 

Mr.  Lambert,        I        am  glad  to        you  see. 

Comment  se  porte  monsieur  Lambert  ? 

How  is  Mr.  Lambert? 

Ma  sante  est  bonne,  mademoiselle  ;  et  la  v6tre  ? 

My     health        is         good,  Miss ;  and  (how  is)  yours  ? 

Merci,  monsieur,  je  me  porte  bien  ;  etmadameL.  \ 

Thank  you,  sir,  I  am  well;      and        Mrs.  L.  ? 

Elle  est  indispos^e  ;  elle  ne  sera  pas  ici. 

She        is  indisposed  ;  she      —      will       not  be  here. 

Est-ce  que  Louise  est  restee  aupres  de  sa  mere? 

Has  Loaiea  remained         with  her     mother? 

Pardonnez-moi  ;  elle  va  venir  avec  son  frere. 

I  beg  your  pardon ;  she      will      come        with       her     brother. 

Je  vous  ai  rencontres    hier,  vous  et  votre  oncle. 

I        you    have  met  yesterday,      you      and        your        uncle. 

Je  vous    ai  vu,  mais  vous  6tiez  d6ja  passe. 

I        you  saw,  but         you         had      already    passed. 

Nous  allions  faire  quelques  emplettes. 

We  were  going     to  make         a  few  purchases       (to  shop). 

Mon  oncle  a  eu  la  bonte  de  m'acheter  un  eventaiL 

My         uncle    has  had  the  kindness    to     me       buy  a  fan. 


AT  BREAKFAST— Continued.  71 

1J9.  Vocabulary, 

on  trient  de  sonner,  the  bell  has     descendez,  go  down; 

just  rung;  je  suivrai,  I  will  follow; 

eh  bien  done!  well  then  I  du  cafe,  coffee;  du  th6,  tea; 

en  retard,  late,  behind;  du  poiston,  fish  ;  un  pen,  a  little; 

ma  faute,  my  fault. 


120,  A  Dejeuner,    (Voir  p.  86.) 

A-t-on  Sonne  pour  le  dejeuner  ? 

Have  they       rung  for        —         breakfast? 

Onvientde  sonner,  etjenesuis  pas  encore  habillee. 

The  bell  has  just        runor,       and  I     —      am      not         yet  dressed. 

Eh  bien  done,  depechez-vous  ;  j'ai  bien  faini. 

Well  then,  make  haste ;  I  am     very     hungry. 

Ne  m'attendez  pas  ;  descendez  ;  je  vous  suivrai. 

—  Do  not  wait  for  me;  go  down  ;  I     "   you       will  follow. 

Bonjour,  maman  ;  nous  sommes  un  peu  en  retard. 

Good-morning,     mamma ;  we  are  a  little  behind. 

C'est  ma  faute  ;  je  me  suis  lev^e  un  peu  troptard. 

It  is       my        fault ;         I  have  risen        a     little       too        late. 

Prenez-vous  du  cafe,  ma  niece  ? 

Do  you  take  —      coffee,      my       niece  ? 

Je  vous  remercie,  ma  tante,  je  prends  du  tli^. 

I  you  thank,  my        aunt,       I  take  —      tea. 

Youlez-vous  de  la  viande  ou  du  poisson  ? 

Will  you  have  —     —      ,  meat         or      —  fish  1 

Je  mangerai  un  peu  de  poisson. 

I  will  eat  a      little     —  fish. 

Et  vous,  Pauline,  que  voulez-vous  ? 

And       you,  Pauline,        what         will  you  have  ? 

Je  prendrai  un  ceuf,  maman,  et  une  tasse  de  lait. 

I         will  take        an       egg,         mamma,       and      a  cup        of     milk. 


1%  AT  A  PlOmC— Continued. 

121,   Vocabulary, 

asseyons-nous,  let  us  sit-down;  une  serviette,  a  napkin; 

mettez,  put ;  defaites,  undo;  unpack;  de  la  limonade,  lemonade;  ( 

versez,  pour  out  ;  passez,  hand;  frais,  fraiche,  fresh,  cool; 

servons-nous,  let  us  make  use;  decoupez,  carve  ; 

une  assiette,  a  plate;  un  poulet,  a  chicken. 


122,  En  rique-Nique.    (Voir  p.  38.) 

Oh  qu'il  fait  bon  ici  sous  les  arbres ! 

Oh     how       good  it  is       here    under    the  trees  I 

Asseyons-nous  sur  ce  banc  et  goutons. 

Let  us  sit  down  on     that   bench    and        lunch. 

Mettez  votrecorbeille  presdel'arbre,  etd^faites-la 

Put  your  basket  near  the   tree,       and      unpack        it. 

Voiei  des  gateaux  et  toutes  sortes  de  bonnes  choses 

Here  are      —  cakes         and       all  kinds       of        good  things. 

Passez  les  serviettes,  et  otez  les  verres  du  panier. 

Hand        the  napldns,         and   take     the       glasses     out  of  the  basket, 

Mettez-les  sur  Fherbe,  ici  devant  nous. 

Put       them    on     the    grass,     here        before  us. 

Yersez  de  la  limonade,  et  donnez  m'en  un  verre. 

Pour  out        some  lemonade,       and        give         me  —      a         glass. 

Allons  cliercher  de  I'eau  au  ruisseau. 

Let  us  go  for  —   —  water  to  the       brook. 

L'eau  du  ruisseau  est  fraiche  et  bonne. 

The  water  of  the       brook  is  cool         and      good. 

Decoupez  le  poulet,  et  passez  les  assiettes. 

Carve  the     chicken,      and        pass         the  plates. 

Nous  avons  oublie  les  fourchettes  ;  il  n'y  en  a  pas 

We  have       forgotten     the  forks ;  there  are  none. 

Qa  ne  fait  I'ien  ;  servons-nous  de  nos  doigts. 

That  makes    (is)     nothing  ;         let  us  make  use         of      our        finders. 


THE  DANOE  ON  THE  SWARD— Continued.  73 

123»  Vocabulary. 

ce  serait,  it  would  be;  vis  a  vis  de,  ox)posite; 

une  contredanse,  a  quadrille;  appeler,  to  call  off; 

un  violon,  a  violin;  une  figure,  a  figure; 

un  cavalier,  a  gentleman;  pensfe  (a),  thought  (of); 

I'ombre,  the  shade;  appris,  learned; 

une  place,  a  place;  vm.  exemple,  an  example. 


124.  La  Danse  stir  la  Pelouse.    (Voir  p.  40.) 

Si  nous  dansions,  ce  serait  charmant. 

If       we       were  to  dance,    that  would  be       charming. 

J^ai  pense  a  cela  ;  j'ai  apport^  mon  violon. 

I  have    thought   of     that ;     1  have       brought  my  violin. 

Dansons  une  contredanse  ici  a  Fombre. 

Let  us  dauce        a  quadrille  here  in  the    shade. 

Cavaliers  aupres  de  vos  dames  ;  en  place. 

Gentlemen  to  your      partners;        in  ^\txce  {take  your  places), 

Vousdeux,  mettez-vous  vis  \  vis  d 'Henri  et  Marie. 

You        two,  place  yourselves         opposite  Ilenry      and     Mary. 

Tiens,  Frederic,  seras-tu  le  maitre  des  ceremonies  ? 

How  80,       Frederick,     are  you  to  be  the      master        of  ceremonies  ? 

Pourquoi  pas  ;  il  faut  que  quelqu'un  le  soit. 

Why  not ;    it  is  necessary  that       some  one      (so)  should  be. 

Mais  est-ce  que  tu  sais    appeler   les  figures  ? 

But  do  you  know    how  to  call  off     the        figures  ? 

Sans  doute  ;  j'ai  appris  cela  a  I'^cole  de  danse. 

Undoubtedly;        I  have    learned         that     at  the        dancing-school. 

Parexemple:  "  Enavant  deux;  "  *' Chassez  liuit.'' 

For         instance:  "  Forward  two ; "  "Chassez." 

"  Balancez  vos  dames,''  et  ainsi  de  suite. 

"  Balance,"  and       so  forth. 

Nous  y  voila  ;  pa  ira  ;  commenpons. 

Here  we  are ;  that  w..  do  ;  let  us  begin. 


74  AT  WORK—Continued. 

125*  Vocahtilary, 

il  reste,  there  remains ;  un  tiroir,  a  drawer; 

j'ai  besoin  de,  I  have  need  of;  un  canif,  a  penknife; 

un  echeveau,  a  skein ;  des  ciseaux,  scissors; 

une  bobine,  a  spool;  la  couleur,  the  color; 

une  aiguille,  a  needle  ;  la  nuance,  the  shade; 

une  epingle,  a  pin.  diflferent,  different,  various. 


126.  A  VOuvrage.     (Voir  p.  43.) 

Comment  va  I'ouvrage  ?  avance-t-il  ? 

How  goes  the      work  ?  does  it  advance  ? 

Ca  va  bien  ;  je  Faurai  fiiii  demain. 

It     goes     well ;         I  it  shall  have  finished   to-morrow. 

II  me  reste  encore  quelques  flenrs  a  fa  ire. 

There  to  me  remains       still  a  few  flowers    to  be  made. 

J'aurai  besoin  de  soie  de  diiferentes  couleurs. 

I  shall  have      need         of      silk      of  different  colors. 

Voulez-vous  m'en  acheter  quelques  ecbeveaux  ? 

Will  you  tome —  buy  a  few  skeins? 

II  y  a  plusieurs  bobines  de  soie  dans  votre  boite. 

There  are  several  spools  of      silk         in  your  box. 

Ce  ne  sont  pas  les  nuances  qu'il  me  faut. 

They  —      are       not     the        shades        which      I       want. 

Je  ne  sals  ce  que  j'ai  fait  de  mes  ciseaux.. 

I      don't  know       what  I  have  done   with      my  scissors. 

Yoila  vos  ciseaux  dans  votre  boite  a  ouvrage. 

There  are  your        scissors  in  your  work-box. 

Y  a-t-il  encore  des  aiguilles  comme  celle-ci? 

Are  there  still  —  needles  like  this  one? 

Tl  y  a  des  aiguilles  et  des  epingles  dans  ce  tiroir. 

There  are     —  needles       and      —  pins  in        that      drawer. 

Voulez-vous  me  passer  ce  canif,   s'il  vous  plait  ? 

Will  you        tome         hand        that  penknife,       if         you         please? 


UKDER  THE  TREES— Continued.  75 

127»  Vocabulary, 

il  court,  he  runs;  la  difference,  the  difference ; 

ils  courent,  they  run ;  entre,  between  ; 

le  plus  vite,  the  fastest ;  le  bois,  the  wood ; 

le  plus  jeune,  the  youngest ;  suivre,  to  follow. 


128.  Sous  les  Arhres.    (Voir  p.  44.) 

Yois-tu  les  deux  gargons  qui  courent  la-bas  ? 

Do  you  see     the       two  boys  who     are  running      yonder  ? 

Je  les  vols  courir  ;  ce  sont  mes  cousins. 

I    them     see  run ;         they     are        my         cousins. 

Jean  court  le  plus  vite,  et  c^est  le  plus  jeune. 

John        runs     the  fastest,  and    he  is     the        youngest. 

Quelle  est  la  difference  d'age  entre  eux  ? 

What  is     the       difference         of  age     between    them? 

Charles  a  dix  ans,  et  Jean  en  a  neuf. 

Charles      is     ten     yean<,  and     John       —    is     nine. 

Charles  n'est  pas  fort ;  il  est  souvent  malade. 

Charles       —    is       not     Ptrong;     he     is  often  sick. 

C'est  pourquoi  il  ne  va  pas  a  I'^cole  a  present. 

That  is  why  he    —    goes     not    to  —  school     at       present. 

II  n'est  pas  aussi  avance  que  son  frbi-e. 

He  —     is       not      so  far      advanced       as        his     brother. 

Parce  qu'il  ne  pent  pas  ^tudier  beaucoup. 

Because  he    —       can        not         study  much. 

II  a  eu  mal  anx  j-eux  pendant  longtemps. 

He  lias  had  sore  eyes'  for  a  long  time. 

lis  vont  au  bois  ;  voulons-nous  les  y  suivre  ? 

They  are  going  to  the   wood  ;  will  we      them   —         follow  ? 

Je  crois  qu'il  est  temps  de  retourner  a  la  maison. 

\      believe     that  it      is  time         to  return  home. 


76  MINE  AND  THINE— Continued. 


129»  Vocabulary, 

iin  parapluie,  an  umbrella  ;  nettoyer,  to  clean ; 

une  galoche,  an  overshoe;  apporter,  to  bring  ; 

une  servante,  a  servant  girl ;  rendre,  to  render,  to  return] 

emporter,  to  carry  away  ;  il  nous  faut,  we  want. 


130.  Le  Mien  et  le  Tien.    (Voir  p.  46.) 

Sais-tu    ou    est  mon  parapluie,  Charles? 

Do  you  know  where       is        my  umbrella,  Charles  ? 

Oui,  le  tien  et  le  mien  sont  a  Fecole. 

Yes,         yours       and        mine  are     at  —  school. 

Elise  n'aura  pas  besoin  du  sien  ;  prends-le. 

Eliza         will  not  have  need        of      hers;  take        it. 

Voici  une  lepon  que  je  trouve  bien  difficile. 

Here  is        a        lesson      which      I  find  very         difficult. 

La  niienne  est  aiissi  difficile  que  la  tienne. 

Mine  Is  as  difficult  as  yours. 

Chaque  eleve  trouve  la  sienne  difficile. 

Every         scholar  finds  his  difficult. 

Oil  sont  mes  galoches  ;  le    sais-tu  ? 

Where      are         my         overshoes;         it      do  you  know? 

Les  tiennes  et  les  miennes  sont  en  bas. 

Yours  and  mine  are      down-stairs. 

La.  ^^Trvante  les  a  eniportees  pour  les  nettoyer. 

The        servant         them  has      carried  away  to        them  clean. 

Dites-lui  de  nous  les  apporter  tout  de  suite. 

Tell       her     to      to  us     them  bring  immediately. 

II  nous  les  faut ;  nous  allons  sortir. 

We  want  them ;  we  are  going  out. 

Nous  allons  rendre  visite  a  nos  amis. 

We        are  going         to  pay  a  visit      to      our      friends. 


THE  CHOICE- Continued.  77 

131.  Vocabulary, 

de  I'or,  gold ;  un  ruban,  a  ribbon  ; 

de  I'argent,  silver;  money;  regard ez,  look  ; 

un  collier,  a  necklace  ;  examinez,  examine  ; 

une  croix  d'or,  a  gold  cross ;  vous  avez  raison  (de),  you  are  right; 

une  montre,  a  watch  ;  choisir,  to  choose  ; 

une  chaine,  a  chain;  un  avis,  an  opinion  ;  bleu,  blue. 


132,  Le  Choix.    (Voir  p.  48.) 

Voyez  les  belles  ehoses,  les  colliers  et  les  croix. 

Behold       the       pretty        things,        the       necklaces     and    the     crosses. 

Kegardez,  examinez,  et  faites  votre  choix. 

Look,  examine,         and  make  (take)    your         choice. 

Yoici  une  croix  d'or,  et  voila  une  chaine. 

Here  is        a  golden  croso,        and      there        a  chain. 

Je  prends  les  deux  ;   ces  ehoses  vont  ensemble. 

I  take  both;  those       things  go  together. 

Vous  avez  raison  de  choisir  eomme  vous  le  faites. 

You  are  right  to        choose  as  you      —         do. 

Etde  ces  deux  chapeaux,  lequel  vous  plait  le  mieux? 

And  of   these      two  bonnets,  which     to  yoti    pleases        best? 

Celui  aux  rubans  bleus  me  plait  mieux  que  I'autre. 

The  one  with  the        blue  ribbons  me     pleases      better      than    the  other. 

Lesquels  de  ces  rubans  trouvez-vous  les  plusjolis? 

Which         of     these     ribbons  do  you  find  the         prettiest? 

Je  trouve  ceux-ci  plus  jolis  que  ceux-la. 

I  find  these  prettier  than         those. 

Dites-moi  quelle  montre  est  la  meilleure? 

Tell        me         which  watch  is     the  best? 

Celle  d'or  e«t  meilleure  que  celle  d'argent. 

The  one    of  gold      irt  better  than    the  one         of  silver. 

Nous  sommes  du  meme  avis  ;  j'en  suis  content. 

We  are  of  the     same        opinion ;     I  of  it      am  glad. 


78  THE  SAL  UTA  TION— Continued. 

133.  Vocabulary, 

unparent,uneparente,  a  relative;  connu,  known;  endormi,  asleep  ; 
nous  appelions,  we  called,  used    elle  avait  I'air,  slie  looked  as  if  ; 

to  call ;  revenu,  returned,  come  back ; 

ferme,  shuts,  closee ;  en  ville,  a  la  ville,  in  town,   tc 

I'cBil,  the  eye ;  town  ; 

9n  lisant,  when  reading ;  a  la  campagne,  in  the  country. 


134,  Le  Salut.    (Voir  p.  50.) 

Quelle  est  la  dame  que  vous  venez  de  saluer? 

Who  is    the      lady       whom      you  have      just    bowed  to  ? 

C'est  uiie  de  iios  parentes  ;  elle  demeure  pres  d'ici. 

She  is     oue      of     our  relatives  (a  relative  of  ours) ;  she  lives        near         here. 

C'est  elle  doiit  la  petite  est  morte,  I'autre  jour. 

It  is        she      whose       little  girl  died,  the  other       day. 

Vous    Tavez    connue  ;    elle  allait   a    iiotre  ecole. 

You         her  have  known ;  she    used  to  go  to         our         school. 

Nous  I'appelions  toujours  "La Petite  Ferme  rffiil.'' 

We    her  used  to  call  always  "  Little  Close        tlie  Eye." 

Parce  qu'  elle  avait  Fair  endormi  quand  elle  lisait. 

Because  she       looked  as  if  (she  was)  asleep        when     she  was  reading. 

C^^tait  une  bonne  fille  que  tout  le  monde  aimait. 

She  was        a  good        girl      whom  everybody  liked. 

Quand  votre  tante  est-elle  revenue  de  la  campagne? 

When  has  your  aunt  —         returned     from  the        country? 

Elle  est  arrivee  en  ville  hier  jh4-  soir. 

She      has         arrived         in      town  yesterday  evening  (last  ni^ht). 

Mon  cousin  Charles  est  revenu  a  la  ville  avec  elle. 

My         cousin  Charles        has       returned     to  town        with      her. 

Mes  cousines  sont  restees  a  la  campagne. 

My  cousins  have        remained     in   the  country. 

N'oubliez  pas  de  dire  a  Charles  de  venir  me  voir. 

Po  not  forget  to       tell     —      Charles       to  come  me  to  see  (to  call  on  roe). 


THE  VISIT— Continued.  79 

l*'i5.  Vocabulary, 

entendu,  heard  ;  prier,  to  ask  ;        un  medecin,  a  physician,  a  doctor  \ 
egal,  equal,  same  ;  il  faudra,  it  will  be  necessary  ; 

c'est  6gal,  it  is  the  same;  no  matter;  au  logis,  at  home;  sa  carte,  his  card; 
donn&,  given ;  repasser,  to  call  again  ; 

les  cheveux,  the  hair;  la  bonte,  the  kindness ; 


136.  La  Visite.    (Voir  p.  52.) 

Avez-vous  entendu  sonner? 

Have        yoa      heard  (the  bell)        ring  ? 

Marie  est  allee  ouvrir  la  porta. 

Mary   has  gone   to  open  the   door. 

C'est  un  monsieur  qui  demande  M.  votre  p^re. 

It  is         a         gentleman         who  asks  for  —         your        father. 

Faites-le  entrer  au  salon,  et  priez-le  de  s'asseoir. 

Hake  him  enter  (show  him  in)  the  parlor,  and     ask    him       to        be  seated. 

Je  crois  que  monsieur  votre  pfere  est  sorti. 

I     believe     that  —  your        father      is         out. 

C'est  ^o^al.     Yous  a-t-il  donne  sa  carte  ? 

No        matter.         To  you  has      he      given       his       card  ? 

La  voici.     II  s'appelle  monsieur  La  Borde. 

Here  it  is.  His  name  is  Mr.  La         Borde. 

C'est  un  liomme  a  cheveux  blancs  qui  a  I'air  d'un 

He  is        a  man  with  white  hair  who  has  the  look  of  a 

m^decin. 

physician  (looks  like). 

C'est  le  vieux  monsieur  que  mon  pere  attendait. 

It  is      the  old  gentleman       whom     my        father      was  expecting. 

II   faudra   lui  dire  que  papa  n'est  pas  au  logis./  ~ 

It  will  be  necessary  him   to  tell      that       papa     —     is        not  in.  ^'L-Aj^j-^ 

Priez-le  d'avoir  la  bonte  de  repasser  demain. 

Ask    him       to  have      the  kindness     to        call  again        to-morrow. 

Dites-lui  que  papa  est  toujours  a  lamaison  a  midi. 

Tell      him     that      papa        is  always  at  home  at     noon. 


80  8UNBI8E— Continued. 

137*  VocahiUary, 

se  lever,  to  rise  ;  conduire,  to  conduct ;  to  take  ; 

ensuite,  then,  afterwards  ;  entrer  (dans),  to  enter  ; 

servi,  served  up  ;  un  pensionnat,  a  boarding-school 

je  suis  press6,  I  am  in  a  hurry  ;  elle  reviendra,  she  will  return. 


138,  Le  Lever  ilu  Soleil.    (Voir  p.  54.) 

Ce  matin  je  me  suis  leve  avant  le  lever  du  soleil 

This  morning      1  have      risen      before  sunrise. 

De  ma  fenetre  j'ai  vu  le  soleil  se  lever. 

I'roiu    my      window      I  have  seen  the      sun  rise. 

Je  me  suis  lave  et  je  me  suis  habill^. 

1  myself       washed  and  —      —        —  dressed. 

Ensuite  je  suis  descendu  pour  dejeuner. 

Then         T     have       come  down  to  breakfast. 

Ma  mere  et  ma  soeur  etaient  dans  la  salle  a  manger 

My     mother  and    —      sister  were  in      the  dining-room. 


o 


Le  dejeuner  etait    servi  ;   nous  etions  presses. 

-^         Brealifast  was       served  up ;        we  were  in  a  hurry. 

Ma  mere  et  ma  soeur  allaient  parti r. 

My       mother    and      —       sister       were  going      to  leave. 

A.pres  le  dejeuner  elles  sont  parties  en  voiture. 

After        —        breakfast  they      have         started  in  a  carriage. 

Ma  m^re  est  allee  conduire  ma  soeur  a  L.  .  .  . 

My        mother         has  gone  to  take  my      sister    to    L.  .  .  . 

Ma  soeur  doit  y  entrer  dans  un  pensionnat. 

My      sister        is  to  there      enter  into         a        boarding-school. 

Elle    va    y    rester  pendant  deux  ou  trois  ans. 

She    is  going  there       to  stay  for  two       or       three     years. 

Quand  elle  reviendra,  elle  parlera  frangais. 

Whea        ebe  returns,  she      will  speak         French. 


ON  THE  ICB— Continued.  81 

139,  Vocabulary, 

la  saiaon,  the  season ;  agreable,  agreeable,  pleasant ; 

le  printemps,  spring  ;  fort,  very;  moins,  lesss; 

I'ete,  biunnier ;  pousser,  to  shoot  up;  de  nouveau,  ancAv; 

I'automne,  autumn  ;  reverdir,  to  grow  green  again  ; 

I'hiver,  winter  ;  renaitre,  to  spring  up  again; 

la  terre,  the  earth  ;  chanter,  to  sing;  se  rfejouir,  to  rejoice. 


14:0,  Sur  la  Glace.    (Voir  p.  56.) 

Henri,  quelle  est  la  saisoii  que  tiiaimes  le  mieiix? 

Henry,         which        is    the     Beaton       that    you      like  best? 

C'est  rhiver  ;  parce  qu'alors  nous  aliens  patiner. 

It  is     —  winter ;  because         then  we  go  ekating. 

Et  quand  la  neige  couvre  la  terre  on  va  en  traineau. 

And       when     —      snow         covers     the    earth    one  goes    in       a  sleigh. 

Moi,  je  n'aime  pas  I'hiver  ;  j'aime  mieux  I'ele. 

—  I         do  not  like        —    winter;        I    like  better     —summer. 

En  6t6  on  est  a  la  campagne,  et  c'est  fort  agreable. 

In  summer,  we   are    in  the  country,         and  that  is   very         pleasant. 

On  ne  va  pas  a  F^cole,  et  I'on  s'amuse  tout  le  temps. 

We        do  not  go      to  —  school,    and     —  amuse  ourselves  all     the      Ihne. 

II  fait  tropchaud  en  ^te  ;  j'aime  mieux  I'automne. 

It     is         too        warm        in  summer ;      I  like         better       —     autumn. 

En  automne  il  fait  moins  cliaud,  etl'on  se  porte  mieux. 

In        autumn       it     is         less  warm,     and  one  feels  better. 

Pour  moi,  le  printemps  est  la  saison  la  plus  belle 

For       me,      —  spring  is     the      season     the     most     beautiful. 

Alorsl'herbe  pousse  de  nouveau,  la  terre  reverdit. 

Then    the   grass       shoots  np  anew,  the  earth  grows  green  again 

Les  fleurs   renaissent,  et  les  oiseaux  chantent. 

The       flowers       spring  up  again,    and   the  birds  sing. 

Tout  rajeuuit  et  tout  se  r^Jouit. 

Everything      revives        and    everything        rejoices. 


82  MAMMA'S  BIRTEDA  T—Continued. 

141,  Vocabulary, 

I'anniversaire,  the  anniversary  ;  feu  d'artifice,  fire-works  ; 

le  mariage,  the  marriage ;  tirer,  to  draw ;  to  set  off  (fire-works)' 

No§l,  Christmas  ;  un  petard,  a  cracker ; 

le  jour  de  I'an,  New- Year's  day;  armes  a  feu,  fire-arms ; 

les  etrennes  \  ^ew-Year's  gifts  ;  presque,  almost ;  puis,  and  then ; 

'  ( Christmas-box  ;  notre  Sauveur,  our  Saviour. 


142,  La  FSte  de  Maman,    (Voir  p.  58.) 

Quel  est  le  jour  de  Fannee  que  tu  aimes  le  mieux  ? 

Which      is    the     day      of   the    year        that    you        like  best  ? 

C'est  le  dix  juin,  Tanniversaire  de  la  f^te  de  maiiian. 

It     is   the  tenth  of  June,  the       anniversary  of         mamma's  birthday. 

Ensuite  j'aiine  presque  autant  le  quinze  mai. 

Then  I  lilie  almost  as  much      the     fifteenth  of  May. 

C'est  raniiiversaire  de  la  fete  de  papa. 

That  is     the      anniversary  of  papa's  birthday. 

II  y  a  aussi  le  seize  avril  que  nous  c616brons. 

There  is      also     the    sixteenth  of  April    which        we  celebrate. 

C'est  ranniversaire  du  mariage  de  mes  parents. 

It  ,48   the      anniversary  of  the       marriage       of       my  parents. 

J'aime  la  fete  de  Noel ;  c'est  la  f^te  de  notre  Sauveur. 

I    like  Christmas ;  it    is  our  Saviour's  birthday. 

Ce  jour-la  mes  oncleset  mes  tantes  dinent  avecnous. 

(On)  that  day     my        uncles    and     my        aunts  dine  with         us. 

Puis  j'aime  le  jour  de  I'an;  c'est  le  jour  des  etrennes. 

And  then  I   like  New  Year's  Day ;       it    is    the     day      for         presents. 

N'aimes-tu  pas  le  quatre  juillet,  la  fete  nationale? 

Do  you  not  like  the  fourth  of  July,  the       national  festival  ? 

J'aime  le  jour,  et  le  feu  d'artifice  qu'on  tire  le  soir. 

I    like      the     day,     and  the  fire-works   which  they  set  ofi"  in  the  evening. 

Mais  je  n'airae  pas  le  bruit  des  petards  et  des 

But         I       -^     do  not  like       the       noise      of  the       crackers       and      — 

arm  OS  a  feu. 

jQr  -Mi-iua, 


A  VISIT  lO  THE  MARKET.  83 


143.  Une  Visite  au  MarchS, 

Samedi  passe  j'ai  ele  au  marclie  avec  mon  pere. 

On  Saturday       last        I     went      to  the      market         with        my       father. 

J'y  ai  vu  toutes  sortes  de  legumes  et  de  fruits  en 

1   there    eaw  all  kinds       of       vegetables     and    —       fruits        in 

grandes  quantit^s.      II  y  avait   des    choux,    des 

large  quantities.  There       were  —         cabbages,         — 

choux-fleurs,  des  pommes  de  terre,  des  6pis  de 

cauliflowers,  —  potatoes,  —         ears       of 

mais,  des  navets,  des    carottes,    des  oignons,  des 

com,         —  turnips,         —  carrots,  —  onions,  — 

haricots  et  des  pois. 

beans,        and      —        peas. 

On    y  voyait   des   tas   de    melons,    des   barils 

One    there       saw  —      heaps     of  melons,  —  barrels 

de  |)ommes  et  de  poires,  des   sacs  de  noix,  des 

of  apples        and     —         pears,  —        bags       of        nuts,         — 

paniers  de  peclies  et  de  prunes,  des  caisses    d'o- 

baskets       of        peaches     and    —         plums,  —  boxes         of  or- 

ranges,  de  citrons,    de   figues,    de    dattes   et   de 

anges,  —  lemons,         —  figs,  —  dates        and 

raisin. 

grapes. 

D'un  autre  c6t^  c'etait  de  la  viande  de  boucherie  ; 

On      another         side    there  was    —    —  butcher's  meat : 

du   boeuf,   du  veau,  du    mouton,  et  de    Tagneau. 

—  beef,  —  veal,        —  mutton,         and    —       —     lamb. 

Plus  loin  il  y  avait  de  la  volaille :  des  dindes,  des 

Farther  on  there  was  —      —       poultry :  —        turkeys,         -» 


84:  ^  VISIT  TO  THE  MARKET. 

poules,  des  poulets,  des  oies,  des  canards  et  des 

hen?,  —         thickens,        —      geese,       •—  ducks       and 

pigeons. 

pigeons. 

Tout   autour    du   marche   6taient   ranges    des 

All  around         the         market  were  drawn  up  — 

chariots   et  des  charrettes,  qui   avaient  apport^ 

wagons        and      —  carts,  which  had  brought 

toutes  ces  choses. 

all         these      things. 

Partout  il  y  avait  une  foule  immense  de  gens 

Everywhere        there  was  a         crowd         immense         of      people 

qui  y  ^taient   venus,    les   uns  pour   vendre,    les 

who  there        had  come,  some  to  sell, 

autres    pour   acheter.      Tout    ce   monde    parlait 

others  to  buy.  All        these       people  spoke 

constamment.     C'^tait  un  bruit  de  voix  vraiment 

constantly!  It    was        a        noise       of      voices  truly 

^tourdissant. 

deafening. 

Mon  pfere  voulait  me  menerau  march^au  poisson, 

My       father       wislicd       me       to  take  to  the  fish  market, 

mais  je  Tai  prie  de  me  reconduire  a  la  maison. 

but        I      him     begged     to       me  reconduct  home. 

J'etais  tres-fatigu6,  et  si  ^tourdi  que  je  n'aurais 

I    was         very  tired,        and   so        stunned         that      I       —    would 

pas    su    retrouver    mon  chemin,    si    mon    pere 

not  have  known  how  to  find  back      my  way,  lif         iry  father 

n 'avait  pas  6te  avec  moi. 

had       not   been     with       m« 


OUR  HOUSE.  "  85 


14:4:,  Notre  Maison, 

Notre  maison  est  spacieuse  et  commode.     Mon 

Our  house         is  spacious       and      convenient.  My 

pfere  Ta  fait  batir  pour  nous,  il  y  a  quelques  ann^es. 

father         had  it  built  for  us,  a  few  years  ago. 

Elle  a  quatre  etages  et  un  sous-sol.     Au  dessous 

It       has       four  stories       and     a        basement.  Below 

du  sous-sol  est  la  cave,  ou  Ton  met  le  charbon  et 

the      basement        is      the    cellar,   where  —  they     put     the         coal  and 

le  bois  a  bruler.     La  il  y  a  aussi  le  calorilere, 

the  fire-wood.  There          is  also       the    calorifer  (furnace), 

qui    ebauffe    toutes  les  parties  de  la  maison,  en 

which         warms  all  the  parts        of     the         house,         in 

envoyant  Fair  chaud  dans  tons  les  appartements, 

sending  hot  air  into         all       the  rooms, 

au  moyen  de  tuyaux  enferm^s  dans  la  magonnerie 

by        means        of  pipes  inclosed  in       the       masonwork 

des    murs.      Ces  tuyaux,  qui  sont  de  tole  ou  de 

of  the        walls.  These         pipes,       which      are        of  sheet  iron  or        — 

ferblanc,  conduisent    a  des  ouvertures  pratiqu^es 

tin  plate,  lead  to     —  openings  made 

dans  les  murs  des  appartements,  et  qu'on  nomme 

in         the      walls     of  the  rooms,  and  which  we  call 

bouches  de  chaleur.     On  pent  les  ouvrir  et  les 

registers.  One         can      them         open      and     — 

fermer  a  volont6. 

shut  as  one  wishes. 

Le  sous-sol,  qui  est  plus  bas  de  trois  pieds  que  le 

The       basement,    which      is  lower  by     three        feet        than  the 

rez  de  chauss6e,  contient  la  cuisine  et  les  offices, 

fevel     of       the  street,  contains      the        kitchen       and    the      pantries, 


86  OUR  HOUSE. 

et  anssi  ime  grande   piece   a  Fusage  des  domes- 

and     al?o  a  large  room     for  the     use         of  tht  serv- 

tiques. 

ants. 

Au  premier  il  y  a  le  salon,  la  bibliotheque  et 

On  the     first  floor  are         the      parlor,      —  library  and 

la  salle  a  mano;er.     Au  second,  sur  le  devant,  il  v  a 

dining-room.  On  the  second  floor,   in   the        front,  is 

Tappartement  de  mes  parents,  et  sur  le  derriere, 

the        apartment  of       my  parents,      and      in     the         rear  (are), 

ma   charabre   et   la   chambre    des   enfants.      L^ 


salle  de  bains  est  au  centre,  entre  la  chambre  de 

bath-room  is    in  the      centre,        between  the  front 

devant  et  la  chambre  de  derriere. 

room       and  the  back  room. 

Au  troisieme  il  v  a  quatre  chambres  a  coucher, 

On  the       third  floor      there  are  four  sleeping-rooms, 

et  au  quatrieme   il  y  en  a  deux,  et  une  grande 

and  on  the  fourth  there  are  two,      and       a  large 

piece  ouverte,  qu'on    appelle  grenier,  et  ou  Ton 

open  place,  which  they  call  garret,        and  where  —  they 

met  toutes  sortes  de  choses. 

put  all  kinds        of        things. 

La  maison  a  deux  portes  d'entr^e.     L^une  est 

The        house       has      two  street  doors.  The  one       is 

la  porte  du  sous-sol.    Elle  est  dans  I'aire  au  dessous 

the  basement  door.  It         is  in      the  area  below 

du    perron.     II    fant   descendre   quatre   marches 

the  stoop.  One  has  to  go  down  four  steps 

pour  y  arriver.     L'autre  porte  conduit  au  premier. 

to  get  there.  The  other        door  leads       to  the     first  floor. 


OUR  HOUSE.  87 

On  y  arrive  de  la  rue  en  niontant  le  perron  de  pierre, 

One  reaches  there  from  the  street  in     ascending     the  stone  stoop, 

qui   a   huit   marches.     Cette    porte   donne   dans 

which    has    eight  steps.  Ttiis  door  opens  into 

le  vestibule.     Une  seconde  porte  admet  dans  I'in- 

the        vestibule.  A  second  door    gives  access      to       the  in- 

t^rieurdelamaisou.     En  entrant  dans  le  corridor 

terior        of  the       house.  Upon      enterin<r  —        the  hall 

on  a  devant  sol,  sur  la  ganclie,  le  grand  escalier  qui 

one  has     before      him,      on     the  left  (hand),  the      large         staircase    which 

conduit  au  second,  et  a  droite,  la  porte  du  salon. 

leads       to  the  second  story,  and  to  the  right,     the      door     of  the    parlor. 

En  allant  tout  droit  le  long  de  la  rampe  qui  borde 

In       going  straight  on  along  the    hand-rail   which   borders 

Tescalier   du    sous-sol,    on    arrive  a   la  porte  de 

the   staircase      of  the       basement,        one        arrives      at     the       door        of 

la  salle  a  manger,  ayant   a   droite   une   seconde 

the  dining  room,  having  to  the      right  a  second 

porte  du  salon,  et  a  gauche  Tescalier  de  service, 

parlor  door,  and  to  the      left         the  servants'  staircase, 

qui  monte  au   second  et  debouche  sur  le  palier, 

which    leads  up  to  the   second  floor  and       terminates  in      the     landing, 

en  face  de  la  salle  de  bains. 

in      front     of     the  bath-room. 

L'eau  est  introduite  dans  toutes  les  chambres 

The  water      is  introduced  in  all  the  sleeping 

a  coucher  au  second  et   au    troisifeme.      II   y   a 

rooms         on  the      second      and      —  third  stories.  There  are 

des  cuvettes  fixes  on  marbre,  chacune  avec  deux 

'.fash-basins        stationary     of         marble,  each  with  two 


88  THE  PARLOR. 

robinets,  Fun  pour  Teau  froide,  Fautre  pour  Feau 

faucets,  one         for  cold  water,        the   other  for  hot 

cliaude. 

water. 

La  maison  est  6clair6e  an  gaz.     Depuis  la  cave 

The        house  is         lighted        by      gas.  From      the     cellar 

jiisqu'au  grenier,  il  y  a,  partout  ou  il  est  rieces- 

to       the  garret,       there  are,  everywhere  it     is  neces- 

saire,  des  tuyaux  a  gaz,  auxquels  sont  ajoutes  des 

sary,  gas  pipes,  to  which  are  affixed 

candelabres,  des   tubes,  ou   des   bras   de  m^tal,  a 

chandeliers,  tubes,  or  brackets     of        metal,  with 

bees  de  gaz. 

gas-burners, 

Derriere  la  maison  il  y  a  une  cour,  et  au  bout  de 

Behind        the       house  is  a         yard,     and  at  the  end      of 

la  cour  il  y  a  Fecurie  et  la  remise,   dont  la  sortie 

the     yard  are       the  stable      and  the   coach-house,       the  egress  of  which 

est  dans  une  ruelle  aboutissant  a  une  grande  rue, 

is         in  a  lane  running  to       a  large         street, 

qui  traverse  la  rue    ou   nous  demeurons  a  une 

which         crosses         the    street  in  which     we  live  at        a 

petite  distance   de   notre  porte. 

short  distance       from         our  door. 


145,  Le  Salon, 


Notre  salon  est  beaucoup  plus  long  que  large. 

"      Our  parlor       is  much  longer  than  (it  is)  broad, 

II  a  deux  fenetres  qui  donnent  sur  la  rue,  deux 

It    has      two  windows      which  look  into    the  street,       two 

portes    qui    communiquent    avec      le  corridor 

doors  that  communicate  with  the  ''"'!, 


THE  PARLOR.  89 

et  au    fond  uue  graiide  porte  a  coulisse,  par  la- 

aud  at  the  lower  end     a  large  sliding-door,  through 

quelle  on  entre  dans  la  bibliotheque. 

which       one      euters         —        the  library. 

Le  plafond  est  tres-eleve,  et  peint   a  fresque. 

The         ceiling  is        very         high,      and    painted     in         fresco. 

Les  niurs  sent  tapiss^s  d'une  tenture,  dont  la  eou- 

The       walls        are  bung        with  paper,  the  delicate  color 

leur  tendre  rehausse  la  dorure  des  corniches.     Le 

of  which  sets  off       the       gilding     of  the  cornices.  The 

plancher   est  convert   d'un    tapis  que    mon  pere 

floor  is  covered        with  a       carpet     which        my        father 

a  fait  venir  d'Angleterre. 

sent  for  to  England. 

Le  mobilier,  qui  a  ete  renouvel^  Tannic  pass^e, 

The       furniture,       which     was  renewed  last  year, 

a  tout  Teclat  de  la  fraicheur.     Des  canapes,  des 

has     all      the   gloss       of  freshness.  —  Sofas,  — 

fauteuils,  des  chaises,  des  tabourets,  des  tables, 

arm-chairs,         —  chairs,  —  stools,  —  tables, 

des  consoles,  des  6tagferes,  des  gu6ridons,  un  grand 

—  consoles,  —  etageres,  —  gueridons,  a       large 

piano,  et  quelques  statues,  qui   repr^sentent  des 

piano,       and  a  few  statues,       which  represent  — 

dieux  et  des  dresses  de  Tantiquit^,  tons    disposes 

gods     and      —       goddesses      of    —    antiquity,  all  arranged 

avec   art  et  bon    gout,    charment  Tceil   par   leur 

with        art     and     good        taste,  please  the  eye        by         their 

vari6t6. 

variety. 

Sur  les  manteaux  de  chemin^e,  sur  les  consoles, 

On       the  mantlepieces,  on      the         consoles. 


90  THE  PARLOR. 

les  ^tag^res,  et  les  gueridons,  on  voit  des  statuettes, 

the         etaijeres,      and    —         gueridons,        one     sees       ~         statuettes, 

des  vases,  et  des  objets  de  fantaisie.     Les  fen^tres 

—         vases,     and      —  fancy  articles.  The        windows 

sont  drap^es  de  rideaux  de  sole  et  de  dentelle,  et 

are  hung        with       curtains        of       silk      and  —  lace,  and 

I'espace  qui  les  separe  est    couvert    d'uiie  glaee 

the    space       which    separates  them        is  covered       with    a        mirror, 

qui  descend  du  plafond  au  tapis.     Les  murs  sont 

which      descends  from  the   ceiling    to  the   carpet.  The        walls        are 

orn^s  de  peintures  a  V  huile.  parmi  lesquels  il  v  a 

adorned   with  oil  paintings,  among  which  are 

le  portrait  de  mon  pere  et  celui  de  ma  mere,  qui 

the        portrait         of        my       father    and     that       of       my     mother,    which 

sont  d'une  ressemblance  parfaite. 

are  perfect  likenesses. 

Deux  grands  candelnbres,  pendant  du  plafond, 

Two  larcfe  chandeliers,  hanging    from  the     ceiling, 

^tendent  leurs  branches  de  tons  cotes,  et  aident 

stretch  forth       their  branches         on         all  sides,       and   contribute 

a  former  un  ensemble  qui  d'abord  parait  confus, 

to         form         an         ensemble        which         at  first  seems        confused, 

mais  qui  est  pittoresque   et  fort  agr^able,  surtout 

but     which       is  picturesque  and   very  pleasing,        particularly 

le    soir,  quand,  le  gaz  etant  allume,  les  nombrenx 

in  the  evening,     when,     the    gas         being        lighted,       the  numerous 

jets  des  candelabres  emettent  un  flot  de  lumiere, 

jets    of  the  chandeliers  send  forth  a       flood    of  light, 

qui  ^blouit  les  yeux. 

wliich       dazzles       the       eyes. 


THE  LIBRARY.  91 


146,  La  Bihllotheque, 

Entrons  maintenant  dans  la  bibliotheque  par  la 

Let  us  enter  now  into     the  library  by      the 

porte  qui  est  an  foud  du  salon.     La  grande  fenetre 

door    which     is  at  the  lower  end  of  the  parlor.      The        large  bow- 

cintr^e  qui  est  vis  a  vis  de  la  porte,  a  I'autre  ex- 

wiudow     which      is  oppot^ite  the       door,      at  the  other         ex- 

tr^mite   de   la  piece,    donne   sur   la  eour.     Cette 

tremity         of     the       room,  looks        into     the       yard.  This 

porte  iei    a  gauche,  communique  avec  la  salle    a 

door     here  to  the        left,  communicates  with      the        dining- 

manger. 

room. 

La  grande  armoire  a  droite,  qui  remplit  I'espace 

The        large  cupboard  on  the    right,      which        fills        the     tpace 

entrc  le   mur  et  la  cheminee,  contient  un  grand 

between    the      wall    and  the       mantlepiece,  contains  a  large 

nond)re  d'objets  curieux,  que  mon  pere  a  recueillis 

number      of    objects  rare,  which      my       father  has        collected 

pendant  ses  differents  voyages  en  Europe. 

dining         his  several  visits  to         Europe. 

Sur  le  manteau  de  cheminee  il  y  a  une  pendule 

On     the  mantlepiece  are  a  time-piece 

et  deux  bustes.     De  I'autre  cote  de  la  clieminee, 

and       two  busts.  On     the  other        eide      of     the      manHepiece, 

adosse  au  mur,  est  un   secretaire,  ou  mon  pere  a 

set  against  the  wall,       is  a  secretary,    at  which  my        father  has 

riiabitude  de  travailler  le  matin. 

the       habit  of  working      in  the  morning. 

Contre  le  mur  a  droite  de  la  fenetre  cinrr^e  est 

Against     the     wall  to  llie    rii,'lit       of     the  bow-window  is 

une  ottomane.  ou  ma  nKTc  vient  souvent  se  re- 

an  ottoin  m,         where    my       moth  r        comes  often  to      rest 


92  TEE  LIBRARY, 

poser  et  s'eiitreteiiir  avec  mon  pere,  quand  il  est 

herself  and  to  converse  with        my        father,        when       he      is 

assis  a  son  secretaire. 

seated    at     his  secretary. 

A  gauche  de  la  feiietre  cintr^e  il  y  a  un  pupitre, 

To  the       left  of   the  bow- window  there  is     a  desk, 

sur  lequel  est  un  ecritoire.     Dans  les  tiroirs  du 

on  which     stands    an         inli-stand.  In  the       drawers    of  the 

pupitre  il  y  a  du  papier  a  lettres,  des  enveloppes, 

desk  are  —  letter-paper,  —  envelopes, 

et  des  timbres  de  poste.     C'est  ici  que  ma  mfere 

and      —  postage-stampp.  It  is      here     that      my      mother 

vient  faire  sa  correspondance. 

comes  to  write  her  letters. 

Le  mur  du  cOt^  de  la  salle  a  manger,  depuis  la 

The     wall  on  the   side        of   the  dining-room,  from        the 

porte  jusqu'au  coin,  est  occupy  par  un  grand  corps 

door  to  the         corner,     is        occupied      by        a  large         book- 

de  bibliotheque,  dont  les  rayons  sont  remplis  de 

case  of  which    the        shelves        are  filled         with 

livres. 

books. 

Contre  le  mur  an  dessus  du  manteau  de  chemi- 

Against     the    wall  above  the  mantlepiece, 

n^e  est  le  portrait  de  ma  grand'mere  paternelle, 

is     the        portrait         of      my  grandmother  paternal, 

et  contre  le  mur  au  dessus  du  secretaire  de  mou 

and      against     the     wall  above  the  secretary  of       my 

pfere,  est  le  portrait  de  mon  grand-p^re  paternel. 

father,       is    the        portrait         of       my  grandfather  paternal. 

Les  portraits  de  mes  aieuls  du  cOt^   de  ma  mere 

The         portraits  of     my  grand-parents  on  the   side  of       my      mother 


TEE  DINING-ROOM.  t)3 

sont  des  deux  cot^s  de  la  fenetre-  cintr^e,  Fun 

are      on  the       two  sides        of    the  bow-window,  the  one 

a  droite  au  dessus  de  Pottomane,  Tautre  a  gauche 

on  the  right  above  the     ottoman,       the  other  on  the     left 

au  dessus  du  pupitre. 

above  the  desk. 

Au  milieu  de  la  pibce  est  une  table  couverte  de 

In  the    middle      of     the     room         is         a         table  covered       with 

drap  vert.     Des  fauteuils  ranges  autour  de  la  table 

green      cloth.          Some     arm-chairs        ranged        around  the    table 

et  places  (?a  et  laeontrelesmurs,  et  un  marchepied, 

and     placed    here  and  there  against     the     walls,     and    a  foot-step, 

qui  sert  a  atteindre  aux  rayons  sup^rieurs  de  la 

which  serves  to  reach  to  the      shelves  upper  of    the 

bibliothfeque,  compl^tent  le  mobilier  de  ce  que  mon 

book-case,  complete         the       furniture       of        what         my 

p^re  appelle  son  cabinet  de  travail. 

father  calls         his  study. 


147*  La  Salle  a  Manger, 

La  salle  a  manger  est  a  cot^  de  la  bibliotli^que. 

The  dining-room  is  next  to        the  library. 

Elle  a  deux  portes  et  une  fenetre  eintr^e,exacte- 

It    has       two  doors        and      a  bow-window,  pre- 

ment  pareille  a  celle  de  la  pifece  voisine.     La  porte 

cisely         similar     to  the  one    of    the  next  room.  The       door 

principale    communique    avec    le  corridor ;    puis 

principal  communicates  with        the  hall;  then 

il  y  a  une  porte  lalerale  qui  donne  dans  la  biblio- 

there  is        a  side-door  which      opens  into     the  li- 

tli^que, 

brary. 


94  THE  DIJS'INQ-ROOM. 

Yoici  les  objets  qui  se  presentent  d'abord.a  la 

Here  are     the     objects     which      present  themselves  at  first         to  the 

vue,  en  entrant  par  la  porte  principale  :  au  centre 

eye,     apon     entering        by    the       door  principal :         in  the     centre 

une  longue  table  a  manger,  des  fauteuils  places 

a  long  dining-table,  —  arm-chairs  placed 

a  droite  et  a  gauche  ;  deux  buffets  adosses  au 

to  the    right       and  to  the      left ;  two      side-tables  set  against  the 

raur  du  cote  gauche  ;  plus  loin,  dans  le  coin  pres 

wall   on  the   side  left ;  farther  on,  in        the   corner     near 

de  la  fenetre,  un  sofa  ;  et  dans  I'autre  coin,  vis  a 

the      window,        a         sofa ;      and       in      the   other     comer,      oppo- 

vis  du  sofa,  une  table.     Entre  la  table  et  le  sofa, 

site    the     sofa,         a  table.  Between    the      table     and  the     sofa. 

et  en  face  de  la  fenetre,  est  une  jardiniere,  sur 

and     in       front     of     the        window,        is  a  flower-stand,        on 

laquelle  il  y  a  un  grand   nombre  de  pots  de  fleurs. 

which       there  are    a  great  number      of       pots    with    flowers. 

On  remarqiie  particulierement  les  favorites  de  ma 

One  notices  particularly  the       favorites         of    my 

mere,  les  hyacinthes,  les  oeillets,  les  geraniums,  les 

mother,       —  hyacinths,  —     carnations,     —  geraniums,         — 

roses.     Les  murs  sont  decores  de  gravures  dans 

roses.  The      walls  are         adorned       with       engravings  in 

des  cadres  dores.     Sur  le  manteau  de  cheminee, 

—  frames         gilded.  On     the  mantlepiece 

il  y  a  des  vases  remplis  de  fleurs,  une  pendule,  et 

there  are      —       vases  filled       with    flowers,        a         time-piece,     and 

des  statuettes  en  bronze. 

—  statuettes         of       bronze. 

D'un  cOt6  de  la  porte  principale  est  la  porte  de 

On  on*      side     of    the      door  principal  is    the        servants' 


THE  KITCHEN.  95 

service,  et  de  I'autre,  il  y  a  un  cabinet,  ou   I'on 

door,         and    on     the  other.       there  is         a  cloect,       iu  which  they 

met  tout  ce  qui  est  necessaire  au  service  de  la 

put  everything      that  is  neceesary        to  the       service         of      the 

table  :    la  vaisselle,  des  plats  de  toute  grandeur, 

table :        the  plate,  —        dishes       of      every  size, 

des  assiettes,  des   soupieres,    des   saladiers,    des 

—  plates,  —  soup-tureens,  —  salad-dishes,  — 

huiliers,  des  saliferes,  des  cafetieres,  des  tli^iferes, 

cruets,  —        salt- stands,        —  coffee-pots,  —  teapots, 

des  tasses  et  soucoupes,  des  sucriers,  des  beur- 

—  cups        and  saucers,  —        sugar-bowls,        —        butter- 

riers,  des  cruches,  des  pots  au  lait,  des  cuillferes, 

dishes,       —  pitchers,  —  milk  pots,  —  spoons, 

des  couteaux  et  des  fourchettes  ;    eniin,  le  linge 

—  knives  and       —  forks ;  finally,      the      table- 

de  table;  les  nappes,  les  serviettes,  et  autres  choses 

linen;  —    table-covers,     —  napkins,        and      other        things 

que  je  ne  saurais  nommer. 

which  I  cannot  name. 


14:8,  La  Cuisine. 


II  faut  aussi  faire  une  visite  au  sous-sol.     Je  ne 

We   must       also  pay  a  visit    to  the    basement.  I 

vais  pas  souventdans  ce  lieu  souterrain,  mais  pour 

do  not  go  often  in       that   place      underground,        but  to 

vous  faire  plaisir  nous  allons  y  descendre,  et  faire 

you  amuse  we  shall    there        go  down,        and    pass 

la  revue  de  toute  la  batterie  de  cuisine. 

in      review  all       the  kitchen  apparatus. 

Vous  y  verrez  notregrossecuisini^re,  qui  rfegne 

you  there  will  see         our  stout  cook,  wjjp       /eigns 


/-A 

96  THE  KITCHEN.        /i 

avec  une  autorite  supreme  sur  les  pots  et  les  ponies. 

with       an         authority         supreme      over    the     pots    and    —         pans, 

Sa  voix  de  stentor  se  fait  entendre  dans  son  do- 

Her     voice  stentorian  is  heard  in        her       do- 

maine,  d^s  que  les  clioses  ne  vont  pas  a  son  gre. 

main,         as  soon  as      —  things  do  not  go  to    her     liking. 

Si  son   aide,  la  laveuse'd'ecuelles,  laisse  tomberde 

If     her     assistant,  the      washer        of       dishes,  lets  fall  — 

la  graisse  ou  des  cendres  sur  la  toile  ciree  qui 

—  grease         or        -  ashes  on       the  oil-cloth  which 

couvre  le  plancher,  ou  qu'elle  laisse  trainer,  hors 

covers       the  floor,  or  lets         lie  about,  out 

de  leurs  places,  le  balai,  le  seau,  le  plumeau,  la 

of        their  places,       the     broom,    the      pail,      the    feather-duster,     the 

pelle,  le  fourgon  ou  les  pincettes,  la  grosse  Marie, 

shovel,    the         poker  or  tongs,  —        stout         Mary, 

c'est   ainsi  que  nous  la  nommons,  la  gronde,  et 

it    is  thus  —  we       her  call,  her  scolds,        and 

souvent   lui    donne  du    torclion  sur  les  oreilles. 

often  to  her  gives  it    with  the   dish-cloth        over      the  ears, 

Elle  veut  que  tout  soit  en  bon  ordre,  et  que  chaque 

She      wants     that      all         be      in    good       order,     and  that      every- 

chose  soit  a  sa  place.     Aussi  faut-il  vous  dire  que 

thing         be     in   its       place.  Also         I  must         you        tell        that 

la   besogne  est  bien  faite.      Vous     remarquerez 

the         business         is        well         done.  You  will  notice 

aisementla  proprcte  du  fourneau  avec  ses  fours,  et 

easily        the       neatness     of  the        range  with        its       ovens,    and 

Feclat  de  tons  les  ustensils,  tels  que    marinites, 

the  brilliancy  of         all         the  utensils,  such         as  saucepans, 

casseroles,  poellons,  broches,  rOtissoires,  bouilloires, 

gtewpans,  pipkins,  spits,        roasting-screens,  kettles, 


/    ^  TH^E  KITCHEN.  97 

r^chauds,  '^cumoires,  et  cliaiidrons,  tous  ^tag^s  en 

chafing-dishes,         ekimmers,        and  boilers,  all      disposed      in 

rangs  luisants  et  pt^lis.  \y^ 

rows  shining       and  polished. 

La  piece  adjacente  est  le  lavoir.  La  blanch isseuse 

The      room       neighboring       is   the  wash-room.     The         wushei  woman 

y  est  maintenant  a  faire  la  lessive.     Les  cuviers 

there   is  now  doing       the       washing.  The      wash-tuba 

fixes  ont  des  robinets  pour  Feau  froide  et  pour 

stationary  have      —  taps  for  cold       and        — 

Feau  chaude.     L'eau  chaude  est  tir^e   du   grand 

hot  water.  The       hot  water  is        drawn  from  the      large 

chaudron  de  cuivre  que  vous  voyez  dans  le  coin 

boiler  of         copper     which      you  see  in       the    corner 

au  dessus  de  Tevier.     L'eau  sale  s'ecoule  dans  les 

above  the  sink-         The  water   dirty        runs  off  in        the 

^gouts  souterrains. 

sewers  underground. 

Le  repassage  du  linge  se  fait  dans  la  chambre 

The  ironing  of  the    linen         is    done        in       the  room 

a  cOt6.     Yous  voyez  a  travers  le  vitrage  les  fers  a 

next.  You  see  through       the  glass-windows  the  smoothing- 

repasser,   qui  sont  a  chauffer.      La  lingbre   exa- 

irons,  which     are  heating.  The      seamstress      exam- 

mine  le  linge  blanchi,  rentr^  du  blanchissage,  et  met 

ines     the    linen         cleaned      come  in  from  the  washing,  and    puts 

de  cote  les  articles  qui  ont  besoin  d'etre  raccom- 

aside         the         articles      which  have         need         of  being  mend- 

modes.     Mais  en  voila  assez.     Remontons, 

•d.  But  that  is  enough.  Let  us  go  up. 

5 


98  MY  BOOM. 


149»  Ma  Chambre, 

Venez,  Lucie,  suivez-moi  ;  nous  allons  monter 

Come,  Lucy,  follow         me ;  we  will  go  up 

a  ma  chambre.     Nous  y  pourrons  causer  a  notre 

to    my  room.  We  there  shall  be  able        to  chat       at         our 

aise,  sans  qu'on  vienne  nous  interrompre.     Ici  vous 

ease,       without  any  one  coming  us  to  interrupt.  Here     you 

^tes  chez  moi,  ma  chore  amie  ;  c'esticimaretraite, 

are       at  my  home,      my        dear        friend ;     this  is     —     my         bower, 

Oil  je  viens  mediter  et  r^ver  pendant  mes  heures 

where  I       come       to  meditate    and    to  muse        during  my         hours 

de  loisir. 

of      leisure. 

Yoila  mon  prie-Dieu,   ou  je  dis  ma  priere,  le 

There  is        my        kneeling-stool,  at  which  I      eay     my       prayers,    in  the 

matin  quand  je  me  leve   et  le  soir  avant  de  me 

morning        when        I  rise  and  in  the  evening  before        I  go  to 

coucher.     Le  lit  ou  je  couche  a  ete  achete   pour 

bed.  The  bed  in  which  I  sleep        has  been      bought  for 

moi  quand  je  suis  revenue  de  chez  ma  tante.     Le 

me  when         I  came  home  from         my     aunt's.  The 

bois  de  lit  est  pareil  a  celui  qui  est  ^ans  la  chambre 

bedstead  is      similar  Ato  the  one  which   is  in      the  room 

de  ma  mere  ;  la  paiHasse  6t^  les  matelas  sont  de 

of       my     mother ;      the   straw-mattress  and  mattresses  are     of  the 

premiere  qualite  ;  les  draps  de  lit  sont  de  batiste, 

first  quality;         the  sheets  are       of       cambric, 

et  les  couvertures  sont  douces  au  toucher.     Le 

and    the  blankets  are  soft        to  the         touch.  The 

couvre-pied  est  d'Mredon,  le  traversin  et  les  oreil- 

coverlet  is     of  eider-down,    the         bolster         and  pil-^ 


MY  ROOM.  99 

lers  sont  de  duvet.     Apr^s  les  fatigues  du  jour,  je 

lows       are       of        down.  After        the        fatigues     of  the    day,       I 

suis  bien  contente  d'y  reposer  ma  t^te. 

am       very  glad         to  there     repose        my      head. 

Le  matin  quand  je  m'^veille,  j'entends  gazouiller 

In  the  moming       wheu       I  awake,  I       hear  chirp 

les  moineaux,  qui  viennent  reeueillir,  des  alleges 

the        sparrows,         which  come  to  gather  np,      from       the  sills 

de  mes  feiietres,  les  miettes  de  paiu  que  j'y  ai 

of        my  windows,        the  crumbs        of       bread    which  I  there  ha vi 

^miettees  la  veille  pour  leur  dejeuner  du  lende- 

crumbled        the  day  before      for        their  breakfast     for  the       next 

main. 

morning. 

Je  m'endors  des  que  je  suis  au  lit ;  mais  quel- 

I         fall  asleep  as  soon  as       I       am      in     bed ;        but        some- 

quefois  mon  sommeil  est  trouble  par  le  eaucliemar. 

times  my  sleep  is       disturbed       by    the__^     nightmare. 

Quand  cela  m^arrive,  je  me  reveille  en 'sursaut. 

Whon  that     to  me  happens,      I  wake  up  with  a  ptart. 

J'entends  alors  les  chats  miauler  sous  mes  fenetres, 

I       hear  then      the      cats  mew        under      my        windows, 

et  les  chiens  aboyer  dans  I'^curie.     Je  me  couvre 

and    the         dogs  bark  in       the   stable.  I  to  myself    cover 

la  t^te  pour  ne  rien  entendre  ;  ear  j'ai  peur  quand 

the    head   in  order  not  anything         to  hear ;  for     I  am  afraid        when 

je  me  trouve  seule  dans  I'obscurit^. 

I  am  alone  in      the       dark. 

Une  fois  reveill^e,  j'ai  de  la  peine  a  me  rendor- 

Once  waked  up,      I  have      some  difllculty  to  fall  asleep 

mir,    surtout    quand    j'entends    les    moustiqucs 

again,        especially  when  I         hear  the  mosquitoes 

bourdonner  autour  de  ma  cousiniere.     Je  n'ainic 

buzz  around  my        mosquito-net.  I      —    like 


100  MT  BOOM. 

point  ces  insectes,  dont  la  piqure  me  fait  bien 

not        these  insects,  whose      —  sting       tome  makes     great 

mal  ;  ni  les  mouches,  qui  me  tourmentent  quand 

pain;      nor    the  flies,  which    me  torment  when 

je  suis  a  I'etude. 

I       am  studying. 

Voila  ma  chaise  ^  bascule   prfes  de  la  croisee. 

There  Is     my  rocking-chair  near  the     window. 

Dans  I'apres-midi,  quand  j^ai  fini  ma  tache,  je  m'y 

In    the        afternoon,  when      1  have  finished  my        task,        I       there 

assieds  pour  voir  les  oiseaux  voltiger  dans  la  cour, 

sit  down         to  see       the  birds  fly  about  in       the     yard, 

et  les  tourterelles  descendre   sur  le  toit  de  Fecurie. 

and   the         turtle-doves  alight  on    the    roof   of    the    stable. 

J'aime  a  les   voir  se  caresser  et    a  les  entendre 

>  I^  like      —   them     to  see     caress  each  other    and    —  them         to  hear 

roucouler. 

coo. 

Ici  est  le  bureau  ou  je  prepare  mes  devoirs  de 

Here     is     the        desk      at  which  I  prepare  my  school- 

classe,  et  la  est  la  commode  dans  laquelle  je  serre 

task,       and  there  is     the  chest  of  drawers       in  which  I    put  away 

mes  effets.     Maman  est  tres-stricte  ;  elle  ne  veut 

my        things.  Mamma        is        very  strict;  she  does  not  wish 

pas  qu'on  laisse  trainer  sur  les    chaises  quoi  que 

that  one      leaves         hanging       upon     the  chairs  anything 

ce  soit.      Elle  vient  parfois   rendre   visite  a  ma 

whatsoever.  She         comes      sometimes         to  pay  a  visit      to     my 

chambre  a  I'improviste,  et  elle  serait  mecontente 

room  unexpectedly,  and    she       would  be  displeased 

de  voir  la  moindre  chose  hors  de  sa  place. 

—    to  see  the  least  thing         out        of    its         place. 

J'acheverai  de  vous  laisser  voir  mon  interieur, 

I   will      finish  you         to  show  my  home, 

en  ouvrant  ce  cabinet,  qui  contient  ma  garde-robe  : 

by       opening      this       closet,       which      contains        my  wardrobe : 

robes,  jupons,  linge,  chaussures,  et  le  reste. 

dresses,     petticoats,      linen,  shoes,  boots,       and  the      rest. 


HISTOEIETTES. 

1,  Les  PSches, 

Un  ouvrier^  de  la  campagne^  rapport a^  un  jour 
k  sa  femme^et  k  ses  quatre  enfants  cinq  belles 
peches.  Les  enfants  voyaient^  ce  fruit  pour  la 
premiere  fois ;  ils  en  admiraient^  la  fraiche  couleur^ 
et  le  fin  duvet^. 

Le  soir^  le  p^re  leur  dit^ : 

"  Avez-vous  mang6  le  beau  fruit  que  je  vous  ai 
donn^  ce  matin  ? 

— Oui,  s'ecria  I'ain^^^,  c'est  excellent.  Aussi^* 
j'en  ai^*  soigneusement^^  garde  le  noyau.  Je  le 
planterai^*,  et  j'esp^re  qu'il  en  sortira^^  un  arbre. 

— Bien,  dit  le  pere  ;  c'est  une  bonne  chose  que 
d'etre  econome^*  et  de  penser  k  Tavenir^"^. 

— Moi,  dit  le  plus  petit,  j'ai  tout  de  suite^^ 
mange  ma  peche,  et  ma  m^re  m'a  encore  donn6  la 
nioitie  de  la  sienne^>  C'etait  doux  comma  du 
mie?^. 

— Ah  !  repondit^^  le  pere,  tu  as  ete  un  peu 
gourmand^.     Mais  k  ton  4ge,  c'est  pardonnable^. 

1.  The  flgnrea  refer  to  the  notes,  p.       ,  etc.    Words  which  have  frequently  oc- 
cnrred  in  the  preceding  lessons  are  not  repeated  in  the  notes. 


102  THE  PEACHES. 

Les  annees^te  corrigeront^^,  j'espere,  de  ce  defaut^. 

— Moi,  dit  un  troisieme,  j'ai  ramasse^''^  le  noyau 
que  mon  petit  frere  avait  jete^  par  terre.  Je  Tai 
brise^,  et  j'y  ai  trouve  une  amande^^  qui  avait  le 
gout  d'une  noix^^  Mais  j'ai  vendu^  ma  peche,  et 
avec  I'argent  que  j'en  ai  regu^,  je  puis^  en  acheter^ 
plusieurs  autres  quand  j'irai^  k  la  ville."  V 

Le  pere  secoua^^  la  tete. 

"  Cela  pent  paraitre^^  une  ingenieuse  idee,  mais 
j'aimerais  mieux^^  moins  de  calcul.  Et  toi,  Ed- 
mond,  as-tu  goute^  ta  peche  ? 

— Mon  pere,  repondit  Edmond,  je  I'ai  portee^^ 
au  fils  de  notre  voisin,  au  pauvre  Georges,  qui  est 
malade  de  la  fievre'*l  II  ne  voulaif**^  pas  la 
prendre^,  mais  je  I'ai  posee^  sur  son  lit^^,  et  je  me 
suis  eloigDe*''. 

— Eh  bien^^,  mes  enfants,  demanda^*^  le  pere,  qui 
de  vous  a  fait^  le  meilleur  usage  du  fruit  que  je 
vous  ai  donne  ?  " 

Et  trois  des  gargons  s'ecrierent : 

"  C'est  notre  frere  Edmond  ! " 

Edmond  ne  disait  rien,  et  sa  mere  I'embrassa^^ 
avec  des  larmes^^  dans  les  yeux^. 


THE  STRAWBERRIES.  103 

2,  Les  Fraises, 

Un  vieux  soldat,  qui  avait  une  jambe  de  bois\ 
arriva  dans  un  village^  oii  il  tomba^  subitement^ 
malade.  Ne  pouvanf*  continuer  sa  route,  il  fut 
oblige^  de  se  coucher^  sur  la  paille'''  dans  une 
grange^,  et  il  etait  fort  k  plaindre^.  La  petite 
Agathe^^,  fille  d  un  vannier"  tres-pauvre,  ressentit^^ 
la  compassion  la  plus  vive^^  pour  le  nialheureux 
invalifle^l  Elle  allait  le  voir^^  tons  les  jours,  et 
chaque  fois  elle  lui  donnait  vingt  centiraes^^. 

Mais  un  soir  Tbonnete  soldat  lui  demanda  d'un 
ton  fort  inquiet^'^ : 

"  Ma  ch^re  enfant,  j'ai  appris^^  aujourd'hui  que 
vos  parents  sont  pauvres.  Dites-moi^^  done 
franehement  ou  vous  trouve:?  tout  cet  argent ;  car 
j'airaei'ais  mieux  mourir  de  faim^  que  d'acceptei*^* 
un  centime  que  vous  ne  pourriez  me  donner  en 
bonne  conscience^. 

— Oh  !  repondit  Agathe,  soyez  sans  inquietude^. 
Cet  argent  est  legitimement^  accpiis^.  Je  vais  k 
r^cole  dans  le  bourg^  voisin.  Pour  y  arriveif  il 
me  faut^  traverser  un  petit  bois  oil  il  y  a^  une 
grande  quantite  de  fraises^   Chaque  fois  que 


104  THE  CHERRIES. 

passe,  j'en  remplis^^  un  petit  paniei*^^  que  je  vends^^ 
dans  le  bourg,  et  Ton  m'en  domie^  vingt  centimes. 
Mes  parents  savent  bien^^  que  je  vous  apporte  cet 
argent,  et  ils  ne  s'y  opposent  point^^  lis  disent 
souvent  qu'il  y  a  des  gens'^^  encore  plus  pauvres 
que  nous,  et  que  nous  devons^^  leur  faire  autant 
de  bien^^  que  nos  nioyens^^  nous  le  permettent." 

Le  vieux  soldat  sentit*''  des  larmes  d'attendrisse- 
ment^^  rouler  de  ses  yeux^^  et  mouiller  ses  mous- 
taches^. 

"  Genereuse  enfant,  s'ecria-t-il,  que  le  bon  Dieu 
vous  recompensed^,  vous  et  vos  parents,  de  ces  sen- 
timents d'humanite ! " 


3.  Les  Cerises* 

Une  jeune  fille,  qui  s'appelait  Sabine^  et  dont 
les  parents^  etaient  tres-riches,  occupait  une 
chambre  meublee^  avec  beaucoup  d'elegance,  mais 
d  un  aspect  desagreable^  k  cause  du  desordre^  qui 
y  regnait^.  Sabine  ne  la  rangeait^  jamais,  et  toutes 
les  exhortations  que  sa  mere  lui  fai^^ait  k  cet  egard^ 
restaient  infructueuses^. 

Un    dimanche    apres-midi,  Sabine    achevait    sa 


THE  CHERniES.  105 

toilette^^  et  se  disposait  k  soi-tir  quand  la  iille  du 
voisin  lui  apporta  line  corbeille  remplie"  de  grosses 
cerises  noires^.  [_pomme  la  table,  les  chaises,  la 
commode^^,  et  meme  les  tablettes  des  fenetres^^ 
etaient  encombrees^'^  de  vetements  et  d'autres  ob- 
jets,  Sabine  plaga  provisoirement^^  la  corbeille  sur 
un  fauteuil  garni^''  d'une-^toffe  de  soie  bleue.  Puis, 
elle  alia  se  promener  avec  sa  mere  dans  le  village. 
Le  soir,  quand  I'obscurite^^  fut  venue,  elle  rentra  k 
la  maison  et  monta  aussitot^®  k  sa  chambre.  Comme 
elle  etait  fatiguee  de  la  promenade  qu'elle  avait 
faite,  elle  se  jeta^  dans  le  fauteuil.  Mais  k  peine 
y  eut-elle  pris  place^,  qu'elle  se  rele  va  brusquement^ 
en  poussant  un  grand  cri  deffroi^:  elle  s  etait 
assise  precisement  sur  la  corbeille  de  cerises.  Au 
cri  que  la  jeune  fille  avait  jete^,  sa  m^re  accourut^, 
une  lumi^re  k  la  main^.  Quel  spectacle^  s^offrit 
alors  k  leurs  yeux  !  Les  cerises  etaient  toutes  ecra- 
sees^,  un  Jus  noir  coulait^  de  tous  cotes  le  long  du 
fauteuil^,  et  la  robe  neuve  de  Sabine,  une  robe  de 
taffetas  blanc,  en  etait  tellement  endommagee^^ 
qu*elle  ne  put  dorenavant  plus  servir^.  La  mere 
voyant  cela,  reprimanda**  sev^rement  sa  fille. 


^06  THE  PLUMS. 

"'iu  vols  inaintenant,  ajouta-t-elle^,  combien  il 
est  necessaire  de  ranger  sa  chambre,  et  de  mettre 
chaque  chose  k  sa  place.  Te  voil^  bien  punie^ 
de  ta  negligence,  et  de  tes  habitudes  de  desordre." 


4,  Les  Prunes, 

Un  jour  M™®  de  Halden  etait  allee*,  avec  sea 
quatre  enfants,  faire  visite^  k  leur  grand-pere,  qui 
les  re^ut  dans  son  beau  jardin.  Le  vieillard^  ap- 
porta  sur  une  feuille  de  vigne"^  quatre  prunes,  qui 
etaient  jaunes^  comme  de  Tor  et  aussi  grosses  que 
des  ceufs^.  C'etaient  les  seules'^  qu'il  eiit  trouvees 
mures®. 

"Je  vous  laisse^,  leur  dit-il  en  plaisantant^^,  le 
soin  de  cliercher"  vous-memes  un  moyen  de  parta- 
ger^^,  sans  fraction,  ces  quatre  prunes  entre^^  cinq 
personnes. 

— Oh  !  je  m'en  charge^*,  repondit  Lenore,  la  plus 
kgee  des  deux  filles.  Seulement^^,  permettez-moi 
de  combiner  k  ma  guise^^  les  nombres  pairs  avec 
les  impairs^V 

Alors  elle  prit^®  les  quatre  prunes  et  dit : 

"  Ma  soeur,  moi  et  une  prune  font  trois^® ;  mes 


THE  JAR  OF  HONEY.  107 

Jeux  fr^res  et  une  prune  font  aussi  trois  ;  deux 
prunes  et  maraan  font  encore  trois^.  De  cette 
maniere  le  partage  est  exact,  et  il  n'y  a  point  de 
fraction." 

Les  fr^res  et  la  soeur  de  L^nore  furent  enchantes 
de  cette  repartition^^  Mais  M™®  de  Halden,  ravie 
de^  Tinge nieuse  combinaison  que  sa  iille  venait  de 
faire^,  et  surtout^  de  la  bonte  de  coeur  qu'elle 
venait  de  montrei*^,  voulut^^  que  chacun  de  ses 
enfants  accept4t^  une  prune.  Le  grand-pere 
donna,  en  outre^,  un  beau  bouquet  k  Lenore.  "Car, 
dit-il,  si  I'ingenieux  calcul  de  ma  petite  Lenore 
fait  beaucoup  d'honneur^  k  son  esprit,  il  en  fait 
plus  encore^  k  son  coeur  filial." 


5,  Le  Pot  de  Miel, 

Un  jour  la  mere  de  la  petite  Marguerite  ^tait 
fort  occupee  dans  la  cuisine,  et  elle  dit : 

"Mon  enfant,  va  vite  me  chercber^  un  citron'. 
Voil^  la  clef  du  garde-mangerl" 

Quand  la  petite  fille  se  trouva  dans  le  garde- 
manger,  elle  le  parcourut*  des  yeux  avec  une 
grande    cnriosite,    ]^on'-    voir   s'il    n'y    avait    pas 


108  THE  JAR  OF  HONEY. 

quelque  friandise^  dont  elle  put^  se  regaler  secrete- 
ment.  Elle  apergut'''  bientot  siir  une  planche^  un 
vase  ou  elle  savait^  qu'il  se  trouvait  du  miel.  Alors 
elle  se  Mssa^^  sur  la  pointe  des  pieds  aussi  haut 
qu  elle  put,  pour  atteindre"  le  pot  et  y  plonger^^ 
le  bout  du  doigt^l 

Mais  k  peine  eut-elle  introduit  le  doigt  dans  le 
vase  qu'elle  se  sentit  pincer^^  d'une  maniere  hor- 
rible. Elle  poussa^^  un  cri  de  douleur,  retira  vive- 
ment^^  la  main,  et  vit  attachee  k  son  doigt  une 
grosse  ecrevisse^^  qui  I'avait  saisie^^  avec  ses 
pinces^^  et  qui  ne  voulait  pas  lecher  prise^. 

En  effet^\  la  mere  avait  vendu  le  miel  quelques 
jours  auparavant^^,  et  comme  le  pot  se  trouvait 
vide^,  elle  j  avait  depose  une  quantite  d  ecrevisses, 
circonstance^  qu'elle  seule  connaissait. 

Au  cri  de  sa  fille^,  la  mere  accourut^  tout 
effrayee  au  garde-manger,  degagea^'''  des  pinces  de 
Tecrevisse  le  doigt  meurtri^  de  Tenfant,  et  dit: 

"  Que  cette  le-gere  punition  te  soit^  un  avertisse- 
ment  utile.  La  friandise  pourrait  avoir  pour  toi 
des  suites^  bien  plus  funestes  encore.  II  n'y  a 
que  trop  de  gens^^  qui,  apres  s'etre  habitues  a  ce 


THE  TURNIP.  109 

defaut  pendant  qu'ils  etaient  jennes,  ont  depense^ 
leur  argent  et  detruit^  leur  sante  en  se  livrant  k 
ce  mauvais  penchant^. 


6.  Tie  NaveU 

Un  pauvre  journalier^  avait  tire^  de  son  potagei*' 
un  navet  d'une  grosseur^  extraordinaire,  et  qui 
faisait^  Tadmiration  de  tout  le  inonde. 

"Je  vais  le  porter  au  chateau^,  dit-il,  et  en 
f  aire  hommage^  h  M.  le  corate®,  ear  il  aime  extreme- 
ment  que  Ton  soigne®  les  champs  et  \es  jardins." 

II  le  porta  done  au  chateau.  Le  seigneur^®  le 
loua"  beaucoup  de^^  son  zele,  le  remercia  de^^  son 
attention,  et  lui  donna  trois  pieces  d'or. 

Un  ferinier^^  du  menie  village,  qui  etait  tr^s- 
riche,  mais  en  meme  temps  tr^s-avare^^,  entendit 
parler^^  de  ce  qui  s  etait  passe^*. 

"J'ai  un  veau^''  superbe,  dit-il ;  je  vais  h  I'ins- 
tant  meme^^  le  conduire  au  cliateau.  Si  M.  le 
comte  a  donne  trois  pieces  d'or  pour  un  miserable 
navet,  combien  ne  men  donnera-t-il  pas  pour  un 
veau  comme  le  mien  ?  " 

Aussitot^^,  il  passa  une  corde  au  cou^  de  I'ani- 


110  HONESTY  REWARDED. 

mal,  le  mena  au  chateau,  et  pria^^  le  seigneur  cle 
I'accepter.  Mais  le  comte,  qui  comprenait  fort 
bien  le  mobile^  secret  de  Tavare,  refusa  d'accepter 
le  present. 

Cependant^,  le  metayer'^  insista  et  continua  de 
supplier^  le  seigneur  de  ne  pas  refuser  un  si  mo- 
deste  liommage.  Le  comte  etait  un  homme  de 
grand  sens. 

"  Eh  bien,  dit-il,  puisque^^  vous  le  voulez  abso- 
lument,  jaccepte  votre  cadeau'^''.  Mais,  comme 
vous  etes  si  genereux  envers^  nioi,  je  ne  veux  pas 
letre  moins  envers  vous.  Aussi^^,  je  veux  vous 
faire  un  present  qui  m'a  coiite^^  deux  fois,  et  meme 
trois  fois  autant^^  que  la  valeur  de  votre  veau." 

Apres  avoir  acbeve  ces  paroles,  il  offrit  au  pay- 
san  interdit^  et  consterne  le  gros  navet  dont  il 
avait  entendu  parler.  • 


7.  La  JProbite  BecompensSe, 

Dans  une  petite  campagne^  vivait^  naguer^'  une 

pauvre  famille  de  bticherons'* ;  elle  etait  composee 

du  pere,  nomm^  Jean  Morin,  de  la  mere  et  d'une 

petite   fiUe,   seule  enfant.      A  six  ans^  la  petite 


HONESTY  REWARDED,  111 . 

Marie  lisait  tr^s-courammeut  et  avait  appris^  toutes 
ses  pri^res ;  elle  faisait''^  la  joie  et  Tesperance  de 
ses  parents ;  mais  le  malheur  devait®  frapper  bien- 
tot  cette  lionnete  famille,  et  detruire^  son  avenir 
de  bien-etre  et  de  tranquilite. 

Dans  le  courant  du  raois  de  juin,  la  m^re  Morin 
vint  h  mourir^^,  et,  deux  mois  apr^s,  son  mari 
succombait^^  aussi,  atteint^  d'une  pleuresie. 

La  petite  Maiie  se  trouvait  done  orpheline  avant 
I'^ge  de  sept  ans.  Que  pouvait  devenir^^  cette 
malbeureuse  enfant,  sans  appui^^,  sans  asile  ? 
Trop  jeune  encore,  et  trop  faible  pour  garder  lea 
bestiaux^^  des  fermes,  elle  dut^^  mendier  pour  sou- 
tenir  sa  triste  existence. 

On  ne  saurait^''  raconter  les  souffrances  de  la 
jeune  Marie, les  privations^^  de  toutes  sortes  quelle 
eut  k  endurer^® :  le  froid,  la  faini,  le  manque  d'abri^, '   ■  -"^^ 
et  sou  vent  des  paroles  dures  et  brutales^^ 

Au  milieu^  de  ces  tribulations,  Marie,  douce  et 
resignee,  n'oublia^  jamais  d  clever  son  coeur  vers 
Dieu,  le  vrai  p^re  des  pauvres.  Deux  ann^es 
s  ecoul^rent^  ainsi.  Un  matin,  en  passant  sur  la 
route  de  Tours,  elle  apergut  au  bord^  d'un  fosse, 


113  HOI{ESTY  REWARDED. 

un  portefeuille  quelle  eut  soin^^  de  ramasser,  avec 
rintention  bien  arretee^  de  le  rendre^  a  eelui  qui 
I'avait  perdu.  Tandis^  qu'elle  reflechissait  aux 
moyens  qu'elle  emploierait^"  pour  en  decouvrir^^  le 
maitre,  un  roulier^^  vint  a  passer.  Marie  lui  de- 
manda  un  conseil.  /  Le  voiturier^^  ouvrit  le  porte- 
feuille et  reconnut^,  par  les  lettres  qu'il  contenait, 
qu'il  appartenait^  k  M.  le  marquis  de  B....  On  y 
trouvait,  entre  autres  papiers^^,  quarante  mille 
francs  en  billets  de  banque^l  "II  y  a  la  une  for- 
tune, dit  rhonnete  roulier  k  I'enfant ;  mais  nous  ne 
devons  point  desirer  le  bien  d'autrui^,  et  tu  as 
bien  fait,  mon  enfant,  de  songei-^^  k  le  rendre. 
Viens  avec  moi  k  Tours,  et  tu  rendras  toi-meme  le 
portefeuille." 

"Arrivee^  a  Tours,  la  jeune  iille  se  rendit^^  avec 
le  roulier  cbez  le  marquis  et  lui  presenta  le  porte- 
feuille. Celui-ci^  le  reconnut  en  effet  pour  celui^ 
qu'il  avait  perdu  la  veille^. 

"  Votre  probite  merite"^^  une  recompense,  dit-il 
au  roulier  et  k  la  jeune  iille.  Vous,  pere  Simon, 
vous  me  devez^  douze  cents  francs  et  les  interets 
de  deux  ans ;  voici  votre  quittance^^.     Prenez^,  en 


THE  OORE.  113 

outre,  ces  dix  mille  francs,  et  quails  vous  servent'^^  a 
Clever  vos  enfants  dans  des  sentiments  aussi  hon- 
netes  que  les  votres. 

"Et  vous,  reprit-iP,  en  s'adressant  k  Marie, 
vous  me  permettrez^^  de  remplacer  les  parents  que 
la  mort  vous  a  ravis^*.  Je  n'avais  qu'une  enfant, 
qui  aurait  votre  age^ ;  je  I'ai  perdue ;  remplacez- 
la ;  devenez^  ma  fille  d  adoption,  et  beniss^s^^^  la 
memoire  de  votre  pere,  qui  a  su^  vous  iuspirer  des 
sentiments  aussi  probes^''^." 


8,  nOgre. 

Deux  petits  gargons  de  la  ville  setaient  ^gar5<^* 
au  fond^  d'une  vaste  foret.  lis  furent  obliges  d« 
passer  la  nuit  dans  une  auberge^  isolee  et  de  mau- 
vaise  apparence. 

Vers  minuit*  ils  entendirent  parler^  dans  une 
chambre  voisine^  de  celle  ou  ils  se  trouvaient. 
Tons  deux  appliquerent  I'oreille  k  la  muraille^, 
pour  ^coutei-^  ce  qu'on  disait.  lis  entendirent 
distinctement  ces  paroles : 

"Femme,  tu  auras  soin^*^  d'ecurer  le  chaudron" 


114  THE  OORff. 

demain  de  bon  matin^^,  car  je  veux  couper^^  la 
gorge  k  nos  deux  petits  citadins^^" 

Les  pauvres  enfants  faillirent^^  mourir  de  peur 
en  entendant^^  le  maitre  de  la  maison  parler  de  la 
sorte,  et  ils  se  dirent^''  tout  bas^^  Tun  k  I'autre  : 

"  Helas  !  cet  homme  est  assurement^^  un  ogre." 
En  disant  ces  mots,  ils  s'approclierent^  de  la  fe- 
netre  et  sauterent^^  dans  la  cour  pour  se  sauver^l 
Malheureusement,  ils  trouverent  la  porte  fermee. 

N'ayant  aucun  moyen  d'echapper,  ils  se  glis- 
s^rent^  dans  le  trou  aux  porcs^,  et  y  passerent  le 
reste  de  la  nuit  dans  une  anxiete  impossible  k  de- 
crire^.  Aux  premieres  lueurs  du  matin^^,  le  maitre 
de  la  maison  entra  dans  la  cour,  ouvrifc  le  trou  aux 
pores,  se  mit^  k  aiguiser  son  couteau,  et  s'ecria  : 

"Allons^,  mes  petits  gargons,  sortez^  de  1^,  car 
votre  derniere  heure  est  venue  !  " 

Les  deux  enfants  pousserent^  un  cri  lamentable, 
et  supplierent^^  k  deux  genoux  I'homme  de  ne  pas 
leur  oter  la  vie^.  Fort  etonne^  de  les  trouver 
dans  Tetable  k  porcs^,  celui-ci  leur  demanda  s'ils 
le  prenaient^  pour  un  ogre. 

Les  petits  gargons  lui  I'epondirent : 


THE  BEQOAR.  Ho 

"N'avez-vous  pas  dit  vous-meme,  cette  nuit,  k 
votre  femme,  que  vous  nous  oouperiez  la  gorge  ce 
matin  ? " 

Alors  Taubergiste^  s'ecria : 

"  Oh  !  les  petit s  insenses^''  que  vous  etes !  Ce 
n'est  pas  k  vous  que  je  pensais"^.  Je  voula's  par- 
]er**  de  mes  deux  eochons  de  lait^,  que  j'appelais, 
par  badinage'*^,  mes  deux  petits  citadins,  parce  que 
c*est  dans  la  ville  que  je  les  ai  achetes.  Mais 
voil^  ce  qui  arrive'^  quand  on  ecoute  aux  portes 
ou  aux  murailles.  On  comprend  mal'^  certaines 
choses,  certaines  autres  nous  suggerent^  de  faux 
soupgons  ;  on  se  cree"*^  de  vaines  inquietudes  et 
des  craintes  chimeriques^,  et  Ton  s'attire  souvent 
des  chagrins'*''  qui  n'ont  pas  de  cause. 


9,  La  Mendiante, 

Dans  un  temps  de  famine^  par  une  rude  et 
froide  saison  d'hiver^,  une  pauvre  femme  inconnue^ 
etait  entree  dans  le  village,  et  allait  de  porte  en 
porte*  demander  I'aumone^  Ses  vetements  etaient 
propres^,  mais  tout  uses  et  rapieces*^  en  divers  en- 
droits®.     Coninie  la  neige  tombait  en  abondance,  et 


116  THE  BEGGAR. 


10 


que  le  vent  soufflait^  avec  force,  elle  avait  serre 
autour  de  sa  tete  un  mouchoir,  qui  ne  laissait 
k  decouvert^^  qu'une  partie  du  visage.  Elle  te- 
nait^^  k  la  main  droite^^  un  baton,  et  au  bras 
gauche^^  elle  portait  un  panier. 

Dans  la  plupart^^  des  maisons  on  ne  lui  donnait^^ 
qu'une  miserable  aumone ;  encore^'''  la  lui  passait- 
on^  simplement  par  la  f enetre ;  il  se  trouva  meme 
quelques  gens  ricbes  qui  la  renvoyerent^^  avec 
durete.  Un  seul  villageois^^,  I'un  des  moins  aises^^, 
la  fit  entrer^^  dans  sa  chambre,  oil  regnait^  une 
douce  chaleur,  et  sa  femme,  qui  venait  de  cuire^^ 
un  gateau,  en  donna  un  gros  morceau  k  la  pauvre 
mendiante. 

Le  lendemain  ,  tous  les  gens  k  la  porte  desquels 
1  etrangfere  etait  venue^^  demander  Taumone,  f urent 
invites^  k  souper  au  chateau  d'un  seigneur  fort 
riche,  qui  habitait^  le  village.  lis  ne  s'attendaient 
guere^  k  cet  honneur.  Et  ce  fut  pour  eux  un 
sujet^de  grand  etonnement.  Lorsqu'ils  entrerent 
dans  la  salle  k  manger,  ils  y  virent^^  deux  tables, 
dont  Tune  etait  chargee  de  mets  delicats^^  et  q\\o\- 
ws  ;  I'autre,  beaucoup  plus  grande,  etait  couverte^' 


THE  BEGGAR  117 

d'une  quantite  d'assiettes,  siir  lesquelles  se  trou- 
vaient  seulement,  soit^  un  petit  morceau  de  pain 
moisi*^,  soit^  une  couple  de  pommes  de  terre,  soit 
une  poignee  de  son^ ;  sur  quelques-unes  meme  il 
n'y  avait  rien  da  tout^. 

Aloi-s  la  dame  du  chateau  leur  dit : 
"  Cette  mendiante  deguisee*  qui  s'est  pr^sent^e 
hier  k  votre  porte,  c'etait  moL 

"  Dans  le  temps  de  detresse^  ou  nous  sommes, 
et  ou  le  pauvre  a  tant  de  peine**  a  trouver  de  quoi 
vivre**,  j'ai  voulu  mettre  k  1  epreuve^  votre  bien- 
faisance.  Les  deux  braves  gens  que  voici*^  m*ont 
permis*^  de  me  r^chauffer'*^  k  leur  foyer,  et  m'ont 
nourrie'*''^  aussi  bien  qu'ils  I'ont  pu.  C'est  pour- 
quoi^  ils  souperont  aujourd'hui  avec  moi,  et  je 
leur  ferai  une  pension"*®  pour  le  reste  de  leurs 
jours.  Quant^  k  vous  autres,  regalez-vous  des 
aumones  que  vous  m'avez  faites  ;  vous  les  trouve- 
rez  1^  sur  ces  assiettes.  Que  ce  qui  vous  arrive 
aujourd'hui  soit^*  pour  vous  une  utile  legon,  et 
reflechissez  qu'il  vous  sera  fait^^,  dans  Tautre 
monde,  selon^  ce  que  vous  aurez  fait,  dans  celui 
ci,  k  votre  prochain'^." 


118  THE  GRASSHOPPER  AND  THE  ANT, 

10,  La  Cigale  et  la  FourmU 
La  cigale  ayant  chante 

Tout  Tete, 
Se  trouva  fort  depourvae 
Quand  la  bise^  fut  venue: 
Pas  un  seul  petit  morceau 
De  mouche^  ou  de  vermisseau^ 
Elle  alia  crier  famine^ 
Chez  la  fourmi,  sa  voisine, 
La  priant  de  lui  preter 
Quelque  grain  pour  subsister 
Jusqu'^  la  saison  nouvelle. 
Je  vous  pairai^,  lui  dit-elle, 
Avant  Taouf^,  foi  d'animaP, 
Interet  et  principal. 
La  fourmi  n'est  pas  pretense^, 
C'est  1^  son  moindre  defaut^^. 
Que  faisiez-vous  au  temps  cliaud? 
Dit-elle  k  cette  emprunteuse". 
Nuit  et  jour,  k  tout  venant^^, 
Je  chantais,  ne  vous  deplaise^^ 
Vous  chantiez  !  j'en  suis  fort  aise^^ 
Eh  bien  !  dansez  maintenant. 


PART   THIRD, 


CONTAININO 

A  CORRECT  ENGLISH  VERSION   OF  THE   FRENCH   EXERCISES 
IN  PART  FIRST  AND  PART  SECOND. 


A    CORRECT  ENGLISH  VERSION  OP  THE  FRENCH  EXER- 
CISES  IN  PART  FIRST  AND  PART   SECOND. 

2.  Charles  and  Mary,    (Page  20.) 

Who  has  Mary's  thimble  ? — Charles  has  Mary's  thimble. — Where 
is  Charles? — Charles  is  here. — Where  is  Charles's  key? — Charles's 
key  is  there. — The  thimble  and  the  key. 

4,  Papa  ami  Mamma,    (Page  21.) 

I  see  papa  and  mamma  on  the  sofa. — Here  are  Charles  and  Mary. — 
There  is  Charles's  key  on  the  table. — Where  is  the  chair? — The  chair 
is  under  the  table. — Who  is  there  ? — It  is  Ann  or  Eliza. 

7.  The  Father,  Mother,  and  Child,    (Page  32.) 

I  see  a  man,  a  woman,  and  a  child. — The  child  has  an  orange. — The 
man  is  the  father  of  the  child. — The  woman  is  the  mother  of  the 
child. — The  wonmn  is  at  the  door  of  the  house. — There  is  a  bench 
under  the  tree. — I  see  a  garden  yonder. 

9,  The  Garden  Gate,    (Page  23.) 

I  see  the  gate  of  the  garden. — The  man  has  the  key  of  the  garden. — 
He  is  going  to  the  garden. — There  is  the  child  at  the  bench. — Has  he 
an  orange  ? — The  woman  has  a  satchel  in  her  hand. — Where  is  she 
going  ? — She  is  going  into  the  house. 

12.  Henry's  Boat.    (Page  24.) 

I  have  a  brother  and  a  sister. — My  brother's  name  is  Henry. — My 
sister's  name  is  Julia. — Henry  has  a  boat ;  Julia  has  a  doll. — Henry's 
boat  is  in  the  water. — Does  it  go  well  ? — It  goes  very  well. 

14,  My  Uncle  and  Aunt,    (Page  25.) 

I  see  your  father  and  mother  yonder. — Your  father  is  my  uncle. — 
Your  mother  is  my  aunt. — I  am  your  cousin. — Julia  is  my  cousin. — 
There  is  Henry  at  the  water  ;  is  he  playing  with  his  boat  ? — Does  Julia 
play  with  her  doll  ? — I  am  going  home. — That  is  well. 


122  AN  ENGLISH  VERSION 

17,  The  Dog  Turco.    (Page  26.) 
Ime  &  large  dog  ;  it  is  a  good  dog. — It  is  called  Turco, — There  is  a 
large  cow ;  it  is  a  good  cow. — Julia  has  a  kitten. — Her  kitten  is  very 
pretty.— Julia  is  my  little  cousin.— I  have  a  good  little  horse.— My 
little  horse  goes  very  well. 

J 9.  The  Friends,    (Page  27.) 
I  see  a  boy  and  a  girl. — He  is  a  very  good  boy. — He  is  my  friend. — 
His  sister  is  a  good  girl. — She  is  my  sister's  friend.— What  have  you  ? 
— I  have  my  little  boat. — Where  are  you  going  ? — I  am  going  to  the 
water  with  Turco. 

22,  The  Walk.    (Page  28.) 
I  am  going  for  a  walk  with  my  uncle. — Do  you  know  that  gentle- 
man ? — Yes,  uncle  ;  that  is  Mr.  Lambert. — That  lady  is  his  wife. — That 
young  lady  is  his  daughter.— That  child  is  his  son  Henry.— Henry, 
are  you  my  friend  ? 

24,  The  Uncle  and  the  Little  One,    (Page  29.) 
Are  you  tired,  Mary  ? — No,  uncle  ;  I  am  not  tired. — Where  is  your 
friend  Anne  ?— I  do  not  see  her. — She  is  not  here  ;  she  is  sick. — Do 
you  know  that  man  ? — Yes,  I  know  him  well. — Where  is  your  bag, 
my  dear  child  ?— I  have  it ;  here  it  is. 

27.  The  Nursery,    (Page  30.) 
Where  are  you  ? — We  are  in  the  nursery. — Where  are  the  books ; 
have  you  them  ? — They  are  here  ;  I  have  them. — The  pens  are  on  the 
table,  with  the  copy-books. — We  have  written. — They  have  read  very 
well. 

29,  Studying.  (Page  31.) 
The  children  are  studying. — I  have  lost  my  pencils. — ^Your  brother 
has  found  your  pencils. — Eliza  has  not  brought  her  books. — My 
friends,  I  saw  your  uncle  and  cousins. — Anne  saw  our  uncle  and 
cousins. — Do  you  know  the  lesson  ? — I  do  not  know  it  well. — These 
children  do  not  know  their  lessons. 

32.  To  School,    (Page  33.) 
What  day  is  to-day  ? — To-day  is  Monday. — It  is  nine  o'clock. — I  am 
going  to  school. — What  books  have  you  there? — They  are  my  books 
—What  lessons  have  we  ? 


OF  THE  FRENCH  EXERCISES.  1 23 

34,   'Hie  Day 8  of  the  Week,    (Page  33.) 

How  many  days  are  there  in  a  week  ? — There  are  seven  days  in  a 
week. — On  Sunday  I  go  to  church. — On  Monday  I  go  to  school. — On 
Tuesday  I  take  a  music  lesson. — On  Wednesday  I  go  to  see  my  aunt. — 
On  Thursday  I  receive  my  friends. — On  Friday  I  go  out  with  mamma. 
—On  Saturday  I  go  to  walk  with  papa. 

57.  In  the  Parlor,    (Page  34.) 

Good  day,  Mr.  Lambert ;  I  saw  you  this  morning. — Good  day,  Mary. 
Where  did  you  see  me  ? — I  saw  you  in  Bridge  street. — I  went  shop- 
ping  with  my  uncle. — I  know  it. — He  bought  you  something  ;  did  he 
not  ? — Who  told  you  that  ? — You  told  it  to  the  children,  and  they 
told  me. 

39.  The  Present,    (Page  35.) 

Charles,  uncle  made  me  a  present. — He  bought  you  a  ring. — Eliza 
told  me  so. — You  must  not  say  anything  to  Henrietta. — He  did  not 
buy  anything  for  her, — For  whom  did  he  buy  the  pretty  pencil-case  ? 
— I  believe  that  he  bought  it  for  your  brother. — There  he  is,  and  your 
sister  Ann,  too. — I  am  going  to  speak  to  them. — You  must  speak 
French. 

42,  At  Breakfast,    (Page  36.) 

Good  morning,  papa  and  mamma;  I  am  hungry. — So  am  I,  mamma; 
I  am  hungry  and  thirsty. — There  is  bread  and  butter,  my  children. — 
Will  you  have  some  meat,  Charles  ? — No,  mamma;  I  thank  you. — Do 
you  drink  milk,  Mary  ?— No,  mamma ;  water,  if  you  please. — I  do 
not  like  milk. 

44,  After  the  Meal,    (Page  87.) 

I  have  breakfasted  well.— Wliat  did  you  eat  ?— I  ate  bread  and 
meat. — I  drank  water. — We  had  some  eggs. — Little  Henry  ate  an  egg. 
— Did  you  have  any  fruit? — We  had  oranges. — I  like  oranges. 

47.  At  a  Picnic.    (Page  38 ) 

We  will  take  lunch  here  under  the  trees. — I  brought  some  good 
cake  and  jelly. — Cliarles  brought  apples  and  pears. — I  have  no  knife. 
Where  are  the  forks  ? — We  did  not  bring  any  forks. — Who  has  the 
glasses  and  cups  ? — Mary  has  them  in  her  basket. 


124  AN  ENGLISH  VERSION 

49,  At  the  Banquet.    (Page  39.) 

Will  you  have  a  piece  of  cake  and  some  jelly  ? — Yes  ;  but  I  have 
no  glass. -^There  are  cups  on  the  bench. — I  have  drunk  a  cup  of  good 
milk. — Are  you  going  for  water  ? — I  have  been  t©  the  brook  for  water. 
— Have  we  sugar  and  lemons  ? — Yes  ;  but  we  have  no  spoons. — I  beg 
your  pardon  ;  we  have  some  small  spoons. 

52,  The  Dance  on  the  Sward,    (Page  40.) 

We  are  going  to  dance  on  the  grass, — Come,  Caroline,  will  you 
dance  with  me  ? — There  is  my  cousin.  I  am  going  to  dance  with  him. 
— She  will  not  dance  with  you. — I  have  often  danced  with  her. — We 
will  play  ball. — Come  ;  will  you  play  with  us  ? — I  am  going  to  play 
with  them. 

54,  TheBetum.    (Page  41.) 

We  are  going  to  return  home. — I  am  going  to  my  house. — You  are 
going  to  your  house  ;  are  you  not  ? — Henry  is  going  to  his  house,  and 
Julius  is  going  with  him. — Julia  is  going  to  her  aunt's  ;  her  mother  is 
there. — You  are  going  home  ;  that  is  well. — We  are  going  with  you. 
— Our  friends  are  going  too. 

57,  At  Work,    (Page  43.) 

What  are  you  making  ? — I  am  making  something  pretty. — I  want 
some  black  thread  ;  have  you  any  ? — I  have  some  ;  there  is  some  in 
my  bag. — There  is  some  black  and  some  white. — Is  there  silk  thread  ? 
■ — There  is  some  silk  and  some  cotton. 

59,  The  Canary-Birds,    (Page  43.) 

Is  there  a  canary-bird  in  that  cage  ? — There  are  two. — My  aunt  likes 
birds  ;  she  has  five. — She  is  up-stairs,  in  her  room. — My  mother  is  there 
too. — Are  your  sisters  there  ? — No  ;  they  are  not  there. — Julia  is  down- 
stairs, and  Mary  is  out. — Is  there  anybody  in  the  parlor  ? — No  ;  there 
is  nobody  there. 

62.  Under  the  Trees.    (Page  44.) 

Charles,  are  you  older  than  your  cousin  ? — No ;  I  am  younger  than 
he. — But  he  is  as  tall  as  I. — How  old  are  you  ? — I  am  nine  years  old, 
and  my  cousin  is  ten. — Are  you  as  strong  as  he  ? — Oh,  yes  ;  he  is  not 
Bo  strong  as  I. 


OF  THE  FRENCH  EXERCISES.  125 

64.  The  Race,    (Page  45.) 

Can  you  run  as  fast  as  he  ? — I  can  run  faster  than  he. — Are  jou  as 
far  advanced  in  your  studies  ? — No ;  he  is  farther  advanced  than  I 
am. — Why  is  he  farther  advanced  than  you  ? — Because  he  studies 
more  than  1. — Do  you  not  study  much  ? — Yes ;  but  not  so  much  as 
Charles  does. 

67.  Mine  and  Thine.    (Page  46.) 

To  whom  does  this  handkerchief  belong  ? — It  belongs  to  me. — I  beg 
your  pardon  ;  it  is  mine.  Julia  has  taken  yours. — There  is  hers  upon 
the  chair. — You  have  my  parasol ;  Ann  has  yours. — She  left  hers  up- 
stairs.— To  whom  do  these  gloves  belong  ? — I  believe  that  they  are 
mine. 

69.  The  New  Clothes.    (Page  47.) 

Your  new  bonnet  is  beautiful. — It  is  more  beautiful  than  mine.— 
That  new  coat  is  fine ;  it  is  a  very  fine  coat. — Her  new  dress  is  as 
beautiful  as  yours. — There  are  some  fine  silk  cravats. — To  whom  do 
these  old  shoes  belong  ? — Your  old  boots  are  down-stairs  with  ours. — 
They  have  a  handsome  house. — Yours  is  as  handsome  as  theirs. 

72.  TJie  Clioice.    (Page  48.) 

My  bonnet  is  new  ;  Julia's  is  old. — Which  one  is  the  best? — My 
dress  is  silk  ;  Mary's  is  woolen. — Which  one  do  you  like  best  ? — Here 
are  cotton  stockings,  and  there  are  woolen  stockings. — Which  ones 
will  you  have,  the  cotton  ones,  or  the  woolen  ones  ? — Here  are  my 
rings,  and  there  are  Mary's. — Which  ones  do  you  think  are  the  pret- 
tiest ? 

74:.  Tfiese  and  Those.    (Page  49^) 

This  coat  belongs  to  me  ;  that  one  belongs  to  Julius. — I  like  this 
one  better  than  that  one.  This  dress  is  silk  ;  that  one  is  woolen. — I 
like  this  one  better  than  that  one. — These  stockings  are  cotton  ;  those 
are  woolen. — These  are  better  than  those. — These  cups  are  prettier 
than  those. — I  like  these  better  than  those. 

77.  Tlie  Salutation.    (Page  50.) 

Do  you  know  the  lady  who  bowed  to  us? — She  is  the  same  lady 
whom  you  have  seen  at  our  house. — She  is  the  one  whose  child  died 
a  few  days  ago. — There  is  a  gentleman  who  bows  to  everybody. — That 


126  AN  ENGLISH  VERSION 

is  a  gentleman  wliom  I  see  every  day. — He  is  the  one  of  whom  my 
father  has  spoken  at  table.— He  has  several  daughters,  all  of  whom 
I  know. — I  see  them  every  time  that  I  go  to  see  my  aunt. 

79,  An  Acquaintance.    (Page  51.) 

There  is  a  gentleman  who  often  comes  to  see  us. — He  is  an  acquaint- 
ance of  my  uncle. — [  have  seen  him  at  my  uncle's  when  I  have  gone 
there.— They  came  from  Paris  together.— They  arrived  here  a  few 
weeks  ago. — My  parents  have  left  for  the  country. — My  sisters  have 
gone  out  ;  Charles  is  at  home  alone. — I  remained  at  home  all  the 
morning. 

82,  The  Visit,    (Page  52.) 

The  bell  rang  and  nobody  has  opened  the  door. — I  beg  your  pardon ; 
the  girl  has  gone. — They  ask  for  somebody  who  does  not  live  here. — 
I  know  the  person  whose  address  they  ask  for. — No  scholar  knew 
how  to  answer  this  question. — They  asked  every  one  ;  all  the  class 
missed  it. — I  know  all ;  they  have  told  me  everything. 

84,  On  Horsehach  and  in  a  Carriage,    (Page  53.) 

Our  neighbors  have  been  in  Paris, — They  resided  there  for  a  long 
time. — Their  children  speak  French  as  well  as  you  do. — They  have 
lived  here  for  a  few  months. — They  drive  out  every  day. — We  have 
lived  here  a  long  time. — My  cousins  are  coming  here  this  afternoon. 
— They  are  coming  on  horseback,  and  are  going  to  stay  until  to-mor- 
row. 

87,  Sunrise,    (Page  54.) 

I  rise  at  sunrise. — Henry  goes  to  bed  early,  and  rises  late. — He  is 
still  in  bed  ;  he  sleeps  till  eight  o'clock. — Julius  is  up,  but  he  is  not 
dressed  yet. — Charles  has  washed  himself;  he  is  dressing  now. — My 
father  is  up  and  has  gone  out  long  since. — He  is  soon  going  to  come 
in  to  breakfast. 

89,   The  Departure,    (Page  55.) 

I  must  remain  here  ;  it  is  too  cold  to  go  out. — I  rose  this  morning 
before  six  o'clock.— I  washed  myself  and  came  down  immediately. — 
My  sister  was  already  in  the  parlor. — She  was  to  leave  after  break- 
fast.— The  carriage  was  before  the  door. — It  was  so  cold,  and  she  had 
9.  sore  throat. — I  had  toothache. — My  mother  had  a  headache. 


OF  THE  FRENCH  EXERCISES.  VZH 

92.  On  the  Ice,    (Page  56.) 

Yesterday,  we  had  a  pleasant  time  ;  we  were  on  the  ice,— Our 
friends  were  tliere  with  us.— They  had  their  skates  ;  they  were  skat- 
ing.—You  passed  us  ;  you  were  in  a  sleigh.— You  were  going  well  ; 
you  had  good  horses. — We  went  along  at  a  good  rate,  but  we  were 
cold. — We  were  warm  ;  we  were  running  continually. — We  amused 
ourselves  well. 

94:,  The  Weatlier,    (Page  57.) 

It  is  bad  weather  ;  it  rains. — Yesterday  it  was  cold  ;  it  froze. — Last 
night  it  snowed.— This  morning  the  sidewalks  were  covered  with 
Buow.— 1  like  snow  better  than  rain.— Do  you  know  what  makes  that 
noise  V-Yes ;  it  is  the  wind  in  the  chimney.— You  must  not  tell 
Charles  what  I  told  you. 

90.  Mammals  Birthday,    (Page  58.) 

I  shall  have  a  pleasant  time  to-morrow  ;  it  will  be  mamma's  birth- 
day.— I  will  make  a  large  nosegay  which  I  will  present  to  her. — I 
shall  carry  it  to  her  room  when  she  has  risen. — She  will  be  well 
pleased  when  she  sees  me. — And  I  shall  be  happy  when  I  see  her 
smile. — I  shall  not  go  to  school  ;  I  shall  stay  at  home. — I  shall  receive 
my  friends  ;  you  will  be  among  them. — You  will  come  to  see  me 
with  your  parents. 

99,  The  Evening  Party.    (Page  59.) 

We  shall  have  company  at  our  house  in  the  evening. — All  our  friends 
will  be  there,  and  we  shall  dance. — We  shall  amuse  ourselves  all  the 
evening. — My  cousins  will  come  there  with  their  parents. — You  will 
see  them  ;  you  will  make  their  acquaintance. — They  will  congratulate 
mamma;  they  will  gladden  her  heart. — She  will  be  adorned  with 
jewels  and  flowers.— And  as  for  me,  I  shall  be  as  happy  as  I  can  be. 

102,  The  Governess,    (Page  60.) 

Henry,  go  for  your  book  and  come  and  say  your  lesson. — Do  your 
task  before  you  go  to  play. — Mary,  go  and  find  Charles,  if  you  please. 
—Tell  him  that  some  one  is  asking  for  him. — Do  not  tell  him  that  ''*^ 
is  I. — Do  me  the  pleasure  to  make  haste. — Do  not  make  me  wai.,  * 
pray  you. — Pay  attention  to  what  I  say. — Listen  to  me  attentively,  and 
keep  still. — Take  care  of  all  my  things,  will  you  ? — See  that  no  one 
touches  them. — Let  us  be  reasonable,  and  obey  our  governess. 


128  ^^  ENGLISH  VERSION 

104.  Charles  and  Mary— Continued.    (Page  63.) 

Where  are  Charles  and  Mary  ? — They  are  there,  at  the  table. — What 
is  on  the  table? — It  is  Charles's  key.— What  has  Charles  on  his  fin- 
ger ? — He  has  Mary's  thimble  on  his  finger. — Whom  do  you  see  on  the 
sofa  ? — I  see  papa  and  mamma  on  the  sofa. — What  is  that  against 
the  wall  ? — It  is  a  small  picture, — What  is  in  the  middle  of  the 
room  ? — There  is  a  table  in  the  middle  of  the  room. 

106,  TJie  Father,  Mother,  and  Child — Continued.    (Page  64.) 

What  is  there  near  the  bench,  under  that  tree  ? — There  is  a  child, 
who  has  an  orange  in  its  hand, — Who  is  that  man,  who  is  going  yon- 
der ? — He  is  the  child's  father  ;  he  is  going  to  the  garden. — Is  the 
garden-gate  open  ? — No ;  but  he  has  the  key  ;  he  is  going  to  open  it, — • 
And  who  is  that  woman  there  ? — She  is  the  man's  wife,  and  the  child's 
mother. — Where  is  she  going  with  her  satchel  ? — She  is  going  to  carry 
her  satchel  into  the  house.— What  is  there  next  to  the  door  of  the 
house  ? — There  is  a  little  window  next  to  the  door. 

108,  Henry's  Boat— Continued.    (Page  65.) 

Who  are  those  children  ? — They  are  my  brother  and  sister. — What 
are  their  names  ?— My  brother's  name  is  Henry,  and  my  sister's  name 
is  Julia,— What  is  Henry  holding  in  his  hand?— It  is  a  rope,  which 
is  attached  to  his  boat.— And  what  is  Julia  holding  on  her  knees  ?— 
She  is  holding  a  doll  on  her  knees. — What  is  she  doing  with  her  doll  ? 
— She  is  playing  with  it,  and  is  looking  at  Henry's  boat. — Whom  do 
you  see  over  there,  on  the  bridge  ?— My  father  and  mother,  who  are 
coming  this  way. 

110,  The  Dog  Turco— Continued.    (Page  66.) 

There  is  a  beautiful  dog,  what  is  his  name  ?— That  is  my  uncle's 
dog  ;  his  name  is  Turco. — To  whom  does  that  beautiful  cow  belong  ? 
—That  cow  belongs  to  my  aunt,— What  is  Julia  holding  in  her  arms  ? 
—It  is  a  kitten  which  my  aunt  gave  her,— There  is  a  pretty  little 
horse  ;  to  whom  does  it  belong  ?— That  is  my  horse  ;  I  ride  upon  it 
every  day. — Do  you  know  that  little  boy  and  girl  yonder  ? — Yes  ;  the 
boy  is  my  friend  ;  he  comes  to  see  me.— The  little  girl  is  his  sister  ; 
she  comes  to  play  with  Julia.— We  will  go  to  the  water  with  my  little 
boat. 


OF  THE  FRENCH  EXEBCISE8.  12[) 

112.  The  Wallc— Continued.     (Page  67.) 

It  is  fine  weather  this  morning;  let  us  go  for  a  walk, — Let  us  turn 
towards  the  boulevards. — There  is  a  gentleman  and  lady  whom  you 
know. — They  are  our  neighbors  with  their  children. — There  are  many 
people  before  that  store. — We  will  go  in  and  see  what  they  sell  there, 
— What  is  in  those  pretty  boxes  ? — There  are  pocket-handkerchiefs 
in  them. — There  is  a  handsome  fan  ;  what  is  the  price  of  it? — This 
fan  is  worth  three  dollars  with  the  box. — If  you  like  it,  Mary,  I  will 
buy  it  for  you. — You  are  very  kind,  uncle  ;  I  thank  you  very  much. 

114,  Tlie  Nui'sery— Continued.    (Page  68.) 

We  have  finished  our  tasks  for  to-morrow. — Will  you  tell  us  a 
story  ? — I  must  first  see  what  you  have  done. — I  have  made  a  drawing ; 
here  it  is. — A  horse  ;  that  is  well  done  ;  I  am  pleased  with  it. — And 
you,  Mary,  have  you  written  your  page  ? — I  have  finished,  but  I  have 
not  succeeded  well. — The  ink  is  not  good  ;  it  is  too  thick. — You  must 
try  to  do  better  next  time. — Anne,  have  you  studied  your  lesson  ? — 
Yes  ma'am,  I  know  it  by  heart. — Then  I  shall  read  you  a  pretty 
story. 

110.  To  School— Continued.     (Page  69.) 

At  what  time  do  you  go  to  school  ? — I  go  at  nine  o'clock  in  the 
morning. — At  what  time  do  you  come  home  ? — I  come  home  at  two 
o'clock  in  the  afternoon. — Are  you  occupied  all  the  time  you  are 
there  ? — We  have  half  an  hour  recess  at  noon. — How  many  scholars 
are  there  in  your  class  ? — I  believe  there  are  fifteen, — On  what  days 
do  you  take  your  music  lesson  ? — I  take  it  Mondays  and  Thursdays. — 
What  do  you  do  Saturdays  ? — I  go  out  with  my  father,  or  I  go  to  see 
my  friends. 

118,  In  the  Parlor— Continued.     (Page  70.) 

This  is  Thursday,  Mary,  your  reception- day. — Mr.  Lambert,  I  am 
glad  to  see  you. — How  is  Mr.  Lambert  ? — My  health  is  good,  Miss  ; 
how  is  yours? — Thank  you,  sir,  I  am  well ;  and  Mrs.  Lambert? — She 
is  indisposed  ;  she  will  not  be  here. — Did  Louisa  remain  with  her 
mother  ? — I  beg  your  pardon  ;  she  will  come  with  her  brother. — I  met 
you  yesterday,  you  and  your  uncle. — I  saw  you,  but  not  until  you 
had  passed. — We  were  going  shopping. — My  uncle  was  so  kind  as  to 
buy  me  a  fan. 


130  AN  ENGLISH  VERSION 

120,  At  Breakfast— Continued.    (Page  71.) 

Has  the  breakfast  bell  rung  ? — It  has  just  rung,  ajid  I  am  not  yet 
dressed. — Well  then,  make  haste  ;  I  am  very  hungry. — Do  not  wait 
for  me  ;  go  down  ;  I  will  follow  you. — Good  morning,  mamma  ;  we 
are  a  little  late. — It  is  my  fault ;  I  rose  a  little  too  late. — Do  you 
take  coffee,  niece  ? — Thank  you,  aunt,  I  take  tea. — Will  you  have 
meat  or  fish  ? — I  will  eat  a  little  fish. — And  you,  Pauline,  what  will 
you  have  ? — I  will  take  an  egg,  mamma,  and  a  cup  of  milk. 

122.  At  a  Picnic— Continued.    (Page  72.) 

Oh,  how  nice  it  is  here  under  the  trees ! — Let  us  sit  down  on  this 
bench  and  take  lunch. — Put  your  basket  near  the  tree  and  unpack  it. 
— Here  are  cakes  and  all  kinds  of  good  things. — Hand  round  the  nap- 
kins, and  take  the  glasses  out  of  the  basket. — Put  them  on  the  grass, 
here  before  us. — Pour  out  some  lemonade,  and  give  me  a  glass  of  it. — 
Let  us  go  to  the  brook  for  water. — The  water  from  the  brook  is  cool 
and  good. — Carve  the  chicken  and  pass  the  plates. — We  have  for- 
gotten the  forks  ;  there  are  none. — That  is  nothing ;  let  us  use  our 
fingers. 

124,  TJie  Dance  on  the  Sward— Continued.    (Page  73.) 

If  we  could  dance,  that  would  be  charming. — I  thought  of  that ;  I 
brought  my  violin. — Let  us  dance  a  quadrille  here  in  the  shade. — 
Gentlemen,  choose  partners  ;  take  your  pi  aces. — You  two,  place  your- 
selves opposite  Henry  and  Mary. — How  so,  Frederick,  are  you  to  be 
master  of  ceremonies  V — Why  not  ?  some  one  must  be. — But  do  you 
know  how  to  call  off  the  figures  ?— Undoubtedly  ;  I  learned  that  at 
dancing-school. — For  instance:  "Forward  two,"  "  Chassez."—"  Bal- 
ance," and  so  forth. — Here  we  are  ;  that  will  do;  let  us  begin. 

126,  At  Work— Continued.     (Page  74.) 

How  is  the  work  progressing  ?  does  it  advance  ? — It  is  advancing 
rapidly ;  I  shall  finish  it  to-morrow. — I  have  still  a  few  flowers  to 
work. — I  shall  need  silk  of  different  colors. — Will  you  buy  me  a  few 
skeins  ? — There  are  several  spools  of  silk  in  your  box. — They  are  not 
the  shades  which  I  want. — I  don't  know  what  I  have  done  with  my 
scissors. — There  are  your  scissors  in  your  work-box, — Are  there  more 
needles  like  this  one  ? — There  are  needles  and  pins  in  that  drawer.^ 
Will  you  hand  me  that  penknife,  if  you  please? 


OF  THE  FRENCH  EXERCISES.  131 

128 »  Under  the  Trees— Continued.    (Page  75.) 

Do  you  see  the  two  boys  who  are  running  yonder  ? — I  see  them  run  \ 
they  are  my  cousins, — John  runs  the  faster,  and  he  is  the  younger. 
— What  is  the  difference  in  their  ages  ? — Charles  is  ten  years,  and 
John  is  nine. — Charles  is  not  strong,  he  is  often  sick. — That  is  why 
he  does  not  go  to  school  at  present. — He  is  not  so  far  advanced  as  his 
brother. — Because  he  cannot  study  much. — He  has  had  sore  eyes  for 
a  long  time. — They  are  going  to  the  woods ;  shall  we  follow  them  ? — 
I  believe  it  is  time  to  return  home. 

130*  Mine  and  Thiner— Continued.    (Page  76.) 

Do  you  know  where  my  umbrella  is,  Charles  ? — Yes,  yours  and 
mine  are  at  school. — Eliza  will  not  need  hers  ;  take  it. — Here  is  a  les- 
son which  I  think  is  very  difficult. — Mine  is  as  difficult  as  yours. — 
Every  scholar  thinks  his  is  difficult. — Where  are  my  overshoes  ;  do 
you  know  ? — Yours  and  mine  are  down-stairs. — The  servant  carried 
them  away  to  clean  them. — Tell  her  to  bring  them  to  us  immediately. 
— We  want  them  ;  we  are  going  out. — We  are  going  to  call  upon  our 
friends. 

132.  The  Choice— Continued.    (Page  77.) 

Look  at  the  pretty  things,  the  necklaces  and  the  crosses. — Look, 
examine,  and  take  your  choice. — Here  is  a  gold  cross,  and  there  is  a 
chain. — I  will  take  both  ;  those  things  go  together. — You  are  right  to 
choose  as  you  do. — And  which  of  these  two  bonnets  do  you  like  best  ? 
— I  like  the  one  with  the  blue  ribbons  better  than  the  other. — Which 
of  these  ribbons  do  you  think  are  the  prettiest  ? — I  think  these  arc 
prettier  than  those. — Tell  me  which  watch  is  the  best? — The  gold 
one  is  better  than  the  silver  one. — We  think  alike  ;  I  am  glad  of  it. 

134,  The  Salutation— Continued.     (Page  78.) 

Who  is  that  lady  to  whom  you  just  bowed? — She  is  a  relative  of 
ours  ;  she  lives  near  here. — She  is  the  one  whose  little  girl  died  the 
other  day, — You  knew  her;  she  used  to  go  to  our  school . — We  used 
to  call  her  "  Little  Close  the  Eye." — Because  she  looked  as  if  she 
was  asleep  when  she  was  reading.— She  was  a  good  girl  whom  ever>^ 
body  liked. — When  did  your  aunt  return  from  the  country  ? — She 
arrived  in  town  last  night. — My  cousin  Charles  came  back  to  town 
with  her. — My  cousins  remained  in  the  country. — Do  not  forget  to  tell 
Charles  to  call  on  me. 


132  AN  ENGLISH  VERSION 

136,  The  Visit-Continued.    (Page  79.) 

Did  you  hear  tlie  bell  ring? — Mary  has  gone  to  open  the  door.— . 
It  is  a  gentleman  who  asks  for  your  father. — Show  him  into  the  parlor, 
and  ask  him  to  be  seated. — I  believe  your  father  is  out. — No  matter. 
Did  he  give  you  his  card  ? — Here  it  is.  His  name  is  Mr.  La  Borde. — He 
is  a  man  with  white  hair,  who  looks  like  a  physician. — It  is  the  old 
gentleman  whom  my  father  expected. — You  will  have  to  tell  him  that 
papa  is  not  in. — Ask  him  to  have  the  kindness  to  call  again  to-morrow. 
— Tell  him  that  papa  is  always  at  home  at  noon. 

138.  Sunrise — Continued.    (Page  80.) 

This  morning  I  rose  before  sunrise. — From  my  window  I  saw  the 
sun  rise. — I  washed  and  dressed  myself. — Then  I  came  down  to  break- 
fast.— My  mother  and  sister  were  in  the  dining-room. — Breakfast  was 
on  the  table  ;  we  were  in  a  hurry. — My  mother  and  sister  were  going 
to  start. — After  breakfast  they  left  in  a  carriage. — My  mother  has 
gone  to  take  my  sister  to  L.  .  .  . — My  sister  is  to  enter  a  boarding- 
school  there. — She  is  going  to  stay  there  for  two  or  three  years. — 
When  she  returns,  she  will  speak  French. 

140,  On  the  Ice — Continued.    (Page  81.) 

Henry,  which  season  do  you  like  best  ? — Winter,  because  then  we 
go  skating. — And  when  there  is  snow  on  the  ground  we  go  sleigh- 
riding. — I  do  not  like  winter  ;  I  like  summer  better. — In  summer  we 
are  in  the  country,  and  that  is  very  pleasant.^We  do  not  goto  school, 
and  we  amuse  ourselves  all  the  time. — It  is  too  warm  in  summer  ;  I 
like  autumn  better. — In  autumn  it  is  not  so  warm,  and  you  feel  better. 
—  To  me  spring  is  the  most  beautiful  season. — Then  the  grass  shoots 
up  anew,  the  earth  grows  green  again. — The  flowers  spring  up  and 
the  birds  sing. — Everything  revives  and  everything  rejoices. 

142,  Mammals  Birthday— Continued.    (Page  83.) 

Which  day  of  the  year  do  you  like  best  ?— The  tenth  of  June,  the 
anniversary  of  mamma's  birthday.— Then  I  like  the  fifteenth  of  May 
almost  as  much.— That  is  the  anniversary  of  papa's  birthday.— We 
also  celebrate  the  sixteenth  of  April.— It  is  the  anniversary  of  my 
parents'  wedding-day.— I  like  Christmas  ;  it  is  our  Saviour's  birthday, 
r— On  that  day  my  uncles  and  aunts  dine  with  us. — And  then  I  like 


OF  THE  FRENCh  EXEHCtSE^.  ISn 

New  Year's  Day  ;  it  is  the  day  for  presents. — Do  you  not  like  the 
fourth  of  July,  the  national  festival  ? — I  like  the  day  and  the  fire- 
works which  they  set  off  in  the  evening. — But  I  do  not  like  the  noise 
of  the  crackers  and  fire-arms. 

143.  A  Visit  to  the  Market,    (Page  83.) 

Last  Saturday  I  went  to  the  market  with  my  father.  I  saw  there 
all  kinds  of  vegetables  and  fruits  in  large  quantities.  There  were 
cabbages,  cauliflowers,  potatoes,  ears  of  corn,  turnips,  carrots,  onions, 
beans,  and  peas. 

There  were  also  heaps  of  melons,  barrels  of  apples  and  pears,  bags 
of  nuts,  baskets  of  peaches  and  plums,  boxes  of  oranges,  lemons, 
figs,  dates,  and  grapes. 

On  another  side  was  butchers'  meat, :  beef,  veal,  mutton,  and  lamb. 
Farther  on  was  poultry  :  turkeys,  hens,  chickens,  geese,  ducks,  and 
pigeon?!. 

Around  the  market  were  standing  wagons  and  carts,  Tvhich  had 
brought  all  these  things. 

Everywhere  there  was  a  great  crowd  of  people,  some  of  whom 
had  come  to  sell,  others  to  buy.  They  all  talked  constantly.  The 
noise  of  voices  was  truly  deafening. 

My  father  wished  to  take  me  to  the  fish-market,  but  I  begged  him 
to  take  me  home  again.  I  was  very  tired,  and  so  confused  that  I 
could  not  have  found  my  way  back,  if  my  father  had  not  been  with 
me. 

144,  Our  House,    (Page  85.) 

Our  house  is  large  and  convenient.  My  father  had  it  built  for  us  a 
few  years  ago.  It  has  four  stories  and  a  basement.  Below  the  base- 
ment is  the  cellar,  where  the  coal  and  firewood  are  kept.  In  the  cel- 
lar is  a  furnace  which  heats  the  whole  house,  by  sending  hot  air  into 
all  the  apartments,  through  pipes  inclosed  in  the  masonwork  of  the 
walls.  These  pipes,  which  are  of  sheet-iron  or  tin  plate,  lead  to  open- 
ings  made  in  the  walls  of  the  rooms  ;  these  openings  are  called  regis- 
ters.   You  can  open  and  shut  them  as  you  wish. 

The  basement,  which  is  three  feet  lower  than  the  level  of  the  street, 
contains  the  kitchen  and  the  pantries,  and  also  a  large  room  for  the 
use  of  the  servants. 

On  the  first  floor  are  the  parlor,  library,  and  dining-room.  On  the 
second  floor,  in  the  front  of  the  house,  is  my  parents'  room,  and  in 


134  AN  ENGLISH  VERSION 

the  back,  are  my  room  and  the  nursery.  The  bath-room  is  in  the 
centre,  between  the  back  room  and  the  front  room. 

On  the  third  floor  there  are  four  sleeping-rooms,  and  on  the  fourth, 
there  are  two,  and  a  large  open  place,  which  is  called  a  garret,  where 
all  kinds  of  things  are  put. 

The  house  has  two  front  doors.  One  is  the  basement  door.  It  is 
in  the  area  below  the  stoop.  To  reach  it  you  have  to  go  down  four 
steps.  The  other  door  leads  to  the  first  floor.  It  is  reached  by  means 
of  a  stone  stoop,  consisting  of  eight  steps.  This  door  opens  into  the 
vestibule.  A  second  door  gives  access  to  the  interior  of  the  house. 
Upon  entering  the  hall  you  have  before  you,  on  the  left  hand,  the 
large  staircase  which  leads  to  the  second  story,  and  on  the  right,  the 
door  of  the  parlor.  Going  straight  on  by  the  hand-rail  which  bor- 
ders the  basement  staircase,  you  reach  the  dining-room  door,  having 
on  your  right  a  second  parlor  door,  and  on  your  left  the  servants' 
staircase,  which  leads  up  to  the  second  story,  and  terminates  at  the 
landing  in  front  of  the  bath-room. 

The  water  is  carried  into  all  the  bedrooms  on  the  second  and  third 
stories.  There  are  stationary  wash-basins  of  marble,  each  having 
two  faucets,  one  for  cold,  and  the  other  for  hot  water. 

The  house  is  lighted  by  gas.  From  the  cellar  to  the  garret,  wher- 
ever it  is  necessary,  there  are  gas-pipes,  to  which  are  attached  chan- 
deliers, tubes,  or  brackets  of  metal,  with  gas-burners. 

There  is  a  yard  behind  the  house,  and  at  the  end  of  the  yard  are 
the  stable  and  coach-house,  which  open  into  a  lane,  running  to  a  wide 
street  which  crosses  the  street  in  which  we  live  at  a  short  distance 
from  our  door. 


145.  The  Parlor.    (Page  89.) 

Our  parlor  is  much  longer  than  it  is  broad.  It  has  two  windows 
which  look  into  the  street,  two  doors  that  communicate  with  the  hall, 
and  at  the  lower  end  a  large  sliding-door,  through  which  you  enter 
the  library. 

The  ceiling  is  very  high,  and  frescoed.  The  walls  are  covered  with 
paper,  the  delicate  color  of  which  sets  off  the  gilding  of  the  cornices. 
The  floor  is  covered  with  a  carpet  for  which  my  father  sent  to  Eng- 
land. 

The  furniture,  which  was  renewed  last  year,  has  all  the  gloss  of 
freshness.  Sofas,  arm-chairs,  chairs,  stools,  tables,  consoles,  etageres, 
gueridons,  a  large  piano,  and  a  few   statues,  which  represent  gods 


OF  THE  FRENCH  EXERCISES.  135 

and  goddesses  of  antiquity,  all  arranged  with  art  and  good  taste,  please 
the  eye  by  their  variety. 

On  the  mantlepieces,  the  consoles,  the  etageres,  and  the  gueridons, 
are  statuettes,  vases,  and  fancy  articles.  The  windows  are  hung  with 
silk  and  lace  curtains,  and  the  space  between  them  is  covered  with  a 
mirror  which  reaches  from  the  ceiling  to  the  floor.  The  walls  are 
adorned  with  oil  paintings,  among  which  are  the  portraits  of  my 
father  and  mother,  which  are  perfect  likenesses. 

Two  large  chandeliers,  hanging  from  the  ceiling,  stretch  forth 
their  branches  on  all  sides,  and  help  to  form  an  ensemble  which  at 
first  seems  confused,  but  which  is  picturesque  and  very  pleasing,  par- 
ticularly in  the  evening,  when,  the  gas  being  lighted,  the  numerous 
jets  of  the  chandeliers  send  forth  a  flood  of  light,  which  dazzles  the 
eyes. 

146.  The  Library,    (Page  91.) 

Let  us  now  enter  the  library  by  the  door  which  is  at  the  lower  end 
of  the  parlor.  The  large  bow-window  which  is  opposite  the  door, 
at  the  other  extremity  of  the  room,  looks  into  the  yard.  This  door 
to  the  left  communicates  with  the  dining-room. 

The  large  cupboard  on  the  right,  which  fills  the  space  between  the 
wall  and  the  mantlepiece,  contains  a  large  number  of  rare  objects, 
which  my  father  has  collected  during  his  several  visits  to  Europe. 

On  the  mantlepiece  are  two  busts  and  a  time-piece.  On  the  other 
side  of  the  mantlepiece,  set  against  the  wall,  is  a  secretary,  at  which 
my  father  is  in  the  habit  of  working  in  the  morning. 

Against  the  wall  to  the  right  of  the  bow-window  is  an  ottoman, 
where  my  mother  often  comes  to  rest  herself  and  to  converse  with 
my  father,  when  he  is  seated  at  his  secretary. 

To  the  left  of  the  bow- window  there  is  a  desk,  on  which  is  an  ink- 
stand. In  the  drawers  of  the  desk  are  letter-paper,  envelopes,  and 
postage-stamps.     This  is  where  my  mother  comes  to  write  her  letters. 

The  wall  on  the  side  toward  the  dining-room,  from  the  door  to  the 
corner,  is  occupied  by  a  large  book-case,  the  shelves  of  which  are 
filled  with  books 

Against  the  wall,  over  the  mantlepiece,  is  the  portrait  of  my  pater- 
nal grandmother,  and  against  the  wall  above  my  father's  secretary, 
is  the  portrait  of  my  paternal  grandfather.  The  portraits  of  my 
grandparents  on  my  mother's  side  are  on  the  two  sides  of  the  bow 
window,  one  on  the  right,  above  the  ottoman,  the  other  on  the  left, 
above  the  desk. 


136  AN  ENGLISH  VERSION 

In  tlie  middle  of  the  room  is  a  table  covered  with  green  cloth. 
Some  arm-chairs  ranged  around  the  table  and  placed  here  and  there 
against  the  walls,  and  a  foot-step,  which  is  used  to  reach  the  upper 
shelves  of  the  book-case,  complete  the  furniture  of  what  my  father 
calls  his  study. 

14:7*  Tlie  Dining-room,    (Page  93.) 

The  dining-room  is  next  to  the  library.  It  has  two  doors  and  a 
bow-window,  precisely  similar  to  the  one  in  the  next  room.  The 
principal  door  communicates  with  the  hall ;  then  there  is  a  side- door 
which  opens  into  the  library. 

The  following  are  the  objects  which  first  present  themselves  to  the 
eye,  on  entering  by  the  principal  door  :  in  the  centre  a  long  dining- 
table,  arm-chairs  placed  to  the  right  and  to  the  left ;  two  side-tables 
set  against  the  wall  on  the  left  side  ;  farther  on,  in  the  corner  near  the 
window,  a  sofa  ;  and  in  the  other  corner,  opposite  the  sofa,  a  table. 
Between  the  table  and  the  sofa,  and  in  front  of  the  window,  is  a 
flower-stand,  on  which  there  are  a  great  many  pots  with  flowers. 

You  notice  particularly  my  mother's  favorites,  hyacinths,  carna- 
tions, geraniums,  and  roses.  The  walls  are  adorned  with  engravings 
in  gilded  frames.  On  the  mantlepiece  are  vases  filled  with  flowers, 
a  time-piece,  and  statuettes  of  bronze. 

On  one  side  of  the  principal  door  is  the  servants'  door,  and  on  the 
other  there  is  a  closet,  in  whicli  everything  is  kept  that  is  necessary 
for  the  table  ;  the  plate,  dishes  of  every  size,  plates,  soup-tureens, 
salad-dishes,  cruets,  salt-stands,  coffee-pots,  tea-pots,  cups  and  saucers, 
sugar-bowls,  butter-dishes,  pitchers,  milk-pots,  spoons,  knives  and 
forks;  finally,  the  table-linen,  table-covers, naokins, and  other  things, 
which  I  cannot  name. 


14:8,  The  Kitchsn,    (Page  95.) 

We  must  also  pay  a  visit  to  the  basement.  I  do  not  often  go  in 
that  underground  place,  but  to  amuse  you  we  shall  go  and  pass  in 
review  all  the  kitchen  apparatus. 

You  will  see  our  stout  cook,  who  reigns  with  supreme  authority 
over  the  pots  and  pans.  Her  stentorian  voice  is  heard  in  her  domain 
as  soon  as  things  do  rot  go  to  her  liking.  If  her  assistant,  the 
dish-washer,  lets  grease  or  ashes  fall  on  the  oil-cloth  which  covers 
the  floor,  or  lets  the  broom,  the  pail,  the  feather-duster,  the  shovel, 


OF  THE  FRENCH  EXERCISES.  13? 

the  poker  ot  tongs  lie  about  out  of  their  places,  stout  Mary,  as  we  call 
her,  scolds  her,  and  often  gives  it  to  her  over  the  ears  with  the  dish- 
cloth. 

She  wants  everything  to  be  in  good  order  and  in  its  place.  I  must 
also  tell  you  that  the  work  is  well  done.  You  will  easily  notice  the 
neatness  of  the  range,  with  its  ovens,  and  the  brightness  of  all  the 
utensils,  such  as  saucepans,  stewpans,  pipkins,  spits,  roasting-screens, 
kettles,  chafing-dishes,  skimmers,  and  boilers,  all  disposed  in  shining 
and  polislied  rows. 

The  room  adjoining  is  the  wash-room.  The  washerwoman  is  there 
now  doing  the  washing.  The  stationary  wash-tubs  have  taps  for  cold 
and  hot  water.  The  hot  water  is  drawn  from  the  large  copper  boiler 
which  you  see  in  the  corner  above  the  sink.  The  dirty  water  runs 
off  in  the  sewers  underground. 

The  ironing  is  done  in  the  next  room.  You  see  through  the  glass 
w^indows  the  smoothing-irons,  which  are  heating.  The  seamstress 
examines  the  clean  linen  which  has  come  in  from  the  washing,  and 
puts  aside  the  articles  which  need  mending.  But  enough  of  this.  Let 
us  go  up  again. 

149,  My  Boom,    (Page  98.) 

Come,  Lucy,  follow  me  ;  we  will  go  up  to  my  room.  We  shall  be 
able  to  chat  there  at  our  ease,  without  any  one  coming  to  interrupt  us. 
Here  you  are  at  my  home,  my  dear  friend  ;  this  is  my  bower,  where 
I  come  to  meditate  and  muse  during  my  leisure  liours. 

There  is  my  kneeling-stool,  at  which  I  say  my  prayers,  in  the  morn- 
ing when  I  rise,  and  in  the  evening  before  I  go  to  bed.  The  bed  in 
which  I  sleep  was  bought  for  me  when  I  came  home  from  my  aunt's. 
The  bedstead  is  similar  to  the  one  which  is  in  my  mother's  room  ;  the 
straw  mattress  and  mattresses  are  of  the  best  quality  ;  the  sheets  are 
of  cambric,  and  the  blankets  are  soft  to  the  touch.  The  coverlet  is  of 
eiderdown,  the  bolster  and  pillows  are  of  down.  After  the  fatigues 
of  the  day,  I  am  very  glad  to  rest  ray  head  there. 

In  the  morning  when  I  awake  I  hear  the  sparrows  chirp,  as  they 
come  to  gather  up,  from  the  sills  of  my  windows,  the  crumbs  of  bread 
which  I  have  crumbled  there  the  day  before,  for  their  next  morning's 
breakfast. 

I  fall  asleep  as  soon  as  I  am  in  bed  ;  but  sometimes  my  sleep  is 
disturbed  by  the  nightmare.  When  that  happens,  I  wake  up  with  a 
start.     Then  I  hear  the  cats  mew  under  my  windows,  and  the  dogs 


138   AK  ENGLISH  VEmiON  OF  TEE  FRENCH  EXERCISER 

bark  in  the  stable.  I  cover  my  head  so  as  not  to  hear  anything,  fori 
am  afraid  when  I  am  alone  in  the  dark. 

Once  waked  up,  I  have  some  difficulty  in  falling  asleep  again,  es- 
pecially when  I  hear  the  mosquitoes  buzz  around  my  mosquito-net. 
I  do  not  like  these  insects,  whose  sting  gives  me  great  pain  ;  nor  the 
flies,  which  torment  me  when  I  am  studying. 

There  is  my  rocking-chair  near  the  window.  In  the  afternoon, 
when  I  have  finished  my  task,  I  sit  down  there  to  watch  the  birds  fly 
about  in  the  yard,  and  the  turtle-doves  alight  on  the  roof  of  the  sta- 
ble,    I  like  to  see  them  caress  each  other  and  to  hear  them  coo. 

Here  is  the  desk  at  which  I  prepare  my  school-task,  and  there  is  the 
chest  of  drawers  in  which  I  put  away  my  things.  Mamma  is  very 
strict ;  she  does  not  wish  me  to  leave  anything  whatever  hanging 
upon  chairs.  She  sometimes  comes  unexpectedly  to  pay  a  visit  to  my 
room,  and  she  would  be  displeased  to  see  the  least  thing  out  of  its 
place. 

I  will  finish  showing  you  my  home  by  opening  this  closet,  which 
contains  my  wardrobe :  dresses,  petticoats,  linen,  boots,  shoes,  and 
the  rest. 


NOTES  OK  HlSTORIETTES  {Stories), 

1»  Les  Pechea  {Tiie  Peaches). 
1.  Un  ou?rier,  a  laborer.  2.  la  campanile,  the  country.  3,  rap- 
porta,  brought  Jiome,  from  rapporter,  to  bring  back ;  to  bring  Jionu- 
4.  voyaieut,  saw,  from  Yoir,  to  see.  5.  ils  en  admiraient,  they  ad- 
mired of  tliem.  6.  la  fraiclie  couleur,  tJie  fresh  color.  7.  le  flu  du- 
vet, tJie  fine  down.  In  English  :  iJiey  admired  their  rosy  color  and 
fine  down.  8.  le  soir,  in  the  evening.  9.  dit,  said,  from  dire,  to  say ; 
to  tell.  10.  s'ecria  I'aine,  exclaimed  the  eldest.  11.  aiissi,  tJierefore. 
13.  j'en  al  garde  le  noyau,  I  have  kept  tJie  stone  {of  it).  13.  soi^nease- 
ment,  carefully.  14.  je  le  planterai,  /  shall  plant  it.  15.  qu'il  en 
sortira,  that  there  will  spHng  up  from  it  16.  que  d'etre  economo, 
to  be  saving.  17.  ^^i^^\\.^QTh.V2i\Q\i\r^  to  think  of  the  future.  18.  tout 
de  suite,  innnediately.  19.  la  moitie  de  la  sieniip,  one  luilf  of  Jiers. 
20.  doux  coninie  le  miel,  sweet  as  honey.  21.  repondit^  answered,  from 
repondre,  to  answer.  22.  un  pen  gourmand,  ratJcer  greedy.  23.  c'est 
pardonnable,  it  is  excusable.  24.  les  annees,  tlie  years,  for  le  temps, 
time.  25.  te  corrigerontj  will  cure  thee.  26.  de  c:^  dbfaut,  of  that 
fault.  27.  ramasse,  picked  up.  28.  jete  p  ir  terre,  thrown  on  the 
ground.  29.  brise,  broken,  from  briser,  to  break.  30.  une  amande, 
a  kernel.  31.  qui  avait  le  gout  d'uue  noix,  whicK  tasted  like  a  nut. 
32.  Tendu,  sold,  from  vendre,  to  sell.  33.  j'en  ai  r^'Qu,  I  have  received 
for  it;  re<ju,  from  recevoir,  to  receioe.  34.  je  puis,  lean,  from  pou- 
Toir,  to  be  able.  35.  en  acheter,  buy  {of  them).  36.  j'irai,  /  shall 
go,  from  aller,  to  go.  37.  secoua  la  tete,  sTiook  his  head.  38.  pent 
paraitre,  may  appear  ;  pent,  from  ponvoir,  to  be  able.  39.  j'aimerais 
mienx,  I  would  like  better,  from  aimer  mieux,  to  like  better.  40.  gou- 
te,  tasted.  41.  portee,  carried.  42.  nialad;  de  la  fl^vro,  sick  with  a 
fever.  43.  il  ne  Toulait  pas,  tie  would  not ;  voulait,  from  Touloir,  ti 
be  willing.      44.  prendre,  to  take.      45.  pos^e,  laid.      46.  lit,  bed. 

47.  je  me  suls  eloign^,  I  went  away,  from  s'eloigner,  to  go  away. 

48.  eh  bien  I  well/  49.  demanda,  inquired.  50.  a  fait,  Jias  made, 
from  faire,  to  make,  to  do.  51.  embrassa,  kissed.  62.  des  larmesj 
tears.    53.  dans  les  jeux,  in  Tier  eyes. 


140  K0TE8  ON  HISTOIUETTEB, 

2,  Les  Fraises  {The  Strawberries). 
1.  Une  jambe  de  bois,  a  wooden  leg.    2.  tomba,  from  tomber,  to 
■fall ;  lomba  iiialade,   was  taken  sick.      3.    subitement,  suddenly. 

4.  pouvaut,  from  poiivoir,   to  be  able  ;  ne  pouvant,  not  being  able. 

5.  oblige  do,  obliged  to.  6.  se  coucher,  lie  down.  7.  la  paille,  tlie 
straw.  8.  line  grange,  a  granary.  9.  h^l'Aindre,  tobepitied.  10.1a 
petite  Aj^athe,  little  Agatha.  11  iin  Yannier,  a  basket-maker. 
12.  ressentit,  felt,  from  ressentir,  to  feel.  13.  la  compassion  la  plus 
vive,  t?ie  greatest  compassion.  14.  le  malheiireux  inyalide,  the  un- 
fortunate invalid.  15.  eMeallaitleToii'f  s/ie  went  to  see  him.  16.  yin^ 
centimes,  twenty  centimes  (four  cents  of  our  money\  17.  d'uii  ton 
fort  inqiiiet,  in  a  very  uneasy  tone.  18.  j'ai  appris,  I  have  heard; 
appris,  from  apprendre,  to  learn;  to  hear.  19.  dites-moi  done, 
tell  me  then.  20.  j'aimerjiis  mieux  mourir  de  faim,  I  would  rather  die 
of  hunger.  21.  ,que  d'accepter,  than  a/xept.  22.  que  yous  ne  pourriez 
me  donner  en  bonne  conscience,  which  you  could  not  give  me  with  a 
clear  conscience.  23.  soyez  sans  inquietude,  be  without  uneasiness  (do 
not  be  uneasy).  24.  lej^itimement,  rightfully.  25.  acquis,  acquired, 
from  acqnerir,  to  acquire,  to  come  by.  26.  bourg-,  town.  27.  pour  y 
arriver,  to  get  there.  28.  il  me  faut,  I  must,  or  I  have  to.  29.  oil  il 
y  a,  where  {here)  are.  30.  j*en  remplis,  I  Jill  {with  them).  31.  panier, 
basket.  33.  ja  Yends,  /  sell,  from  Yendre,  to  sell.  33.  et  I'on  m'en 
donne^  and  they  give  me  for  them.  34.  saYcnt  bieii,  know  well,  from 
saYoir,  to  know.  35.  ne  s'y  opposent  point,  are  not  opposed  to  it. 
36.  des  gens,  people.  37.  nous  dcYons,  we  sliould.  38.  autant  de 
bien,  as  much  good.  39.  moyens,  means.  40.  seiitit,  felt,  from 
sentir,  to  feel.  41.  des  larmes  d'attendrissement,  tears  of  emotion. 
42.  rouler  de  ses  yeux,  drop  from  his  eyes.  43.  mouiller  ses 
moustaches,  moisten  his  moustache.  44.  que  le  bon  Dieu  vous  re- 
compense, may  the  good  God  reward  you. 


3,  Les  Cerises  {The  Cherries), 
1.  Qui  s'appelait  Sabine,  who  was  called  Sabina.     2.  dont  les 
parents,  wh^se  parents.    3.  une  cliambre  meublee,  a  room  furnished. 


NOTES  ON  HI8T0BIETTE8.  141 

4.  d'un  aspect  desagr^able,  unpleasant  to  look  at.  5.  ^  cause  du 
desordro,  on  account  of  tlie  disorder.  6.  qui  y  regiiait,  which  pre- 
vailed in  it.  7.  ran^eait,  put  in  order,  from  rang:er,  to  arrange,  to 
put  in  order.  8.  h.  cet  eg'ard,  in  regard  to  it.  9.  iiifriietueiiscs, 
fruitless.  10.  acliCTait  sa  toilette,  icas  finishing  her  toilet.  11.  iiiie 
corbeille  reniplie  dc,  a  basket  filled  with.  12.  cerises  iioires,  black 
cherries.  13.  coiniiiode,  bureau.  14.  tablettes  des  fenetres,  window- 
sills.  15.  encoiiibrees  de  yetements,  covered  with  clothing.  16.  pro* 
visoirement, /<:>/'  the  time.  17.  faiiteuil  garni  de,  arm-chair  covered 
with.  18.  qiiaiid  I'obscurite  fiit  venue,  ichen  darkness  had  come  ;  in 
Y^ngMsh-fWhenitliad  grown  dark.  \^.  Si\\^ft\i(ii^  immediately.  20.  elle 
se  jeta,  she  threw  Iterself.  21.  a  peine  y  eut-elle  pris  place,  scarcely 
had  she  taken  her  xeat.  22.  qu'ell  se  releva  brusquement,  wlien  she 
suddenly  arose.  23.  cri  d'effroi,  ci-y  of  Iwrror.  24.  avait  jet^,  Jiad 
uttered.  25.  nccowrwX^  hurried  iip.  2G.  une  luniiere  Ma  main,  m^^ 
a  light  in  Iter  hand.  27.  quel  spectacle,  ichat  a  sight.  28.  ecrase?s, 
crushed.  29.  un  jus  noir  coulait,  a  black  juice  ran.  30.  de  tons 
cotes  le  long  du  fauteuil,  on  all  sides  down  tJie  arm-cJiair.  31.  tene- 
ment endommagfco,  so  much  damaged.  32.  qu'elle  ne  put  plus 
servir,  that  it  could  ,  ot  be  used  any  more.  33.  reprimanda.  scolded. 
34.  ajouta-t-elle^  sJie  added.  35.  te  voila  bien  punie  de,  now  you,  are 
well  punislied  for. 


4»  Les  Prunes  {TJte  Plumbs), 

1.  :^tait  allee,  went.  2.  faire  vi^itc  a,  to  call  on.  3.  le  vieillard, 
the  old  gentleman.  4.  une  feuille  de  vigne,  a  grape-tine  leaf. 
5.  jaunes,  yeUow.  6.  aussi  grosses  que  des  (Bufs,  as  large  as  eggs. 
7.  les  seules,  ths  only  ones.  8.  qu'il  eut  trouvees  mures,  which  he 
had  found  ripe.  9.  je  vous  laisse,  I  leave  you.  10.  en  plaisantant, 
jokingly.  W.  i:\kQrc\mYi  to  seek  ;  to  find.  12.  partager,  to  cfi«e<fo.  13. 
entre,  amxmg.  14.  je  m'en  charge,  I  undertake  {to  do)  it.  15.  senle- 
nient,  oidy.  16.  de  combiner  a  ma  guise,  to  combine  in  my  way. 
17.  les  nombres  pairs  avec  les  impairs,  the  even  and  odd  numbers. 
IS.  elle  prit,  sJie  took,  from  prendre,  to  take.    19.  font  trois,  are 


142  NOTES  ON  IU8T0RIETTE8. 

three.  20.  font  encore  trois,  are  three  again.  21.  repartition,  divi 
mn.  22.  ravie  de,  delighted  with.  23.  venait  de  faire^  had  just 
made.  24.  surtout,  especially.  25.  venait  de  niontrer,  had  shawn, 
26.  Youlut  que,  wislud  that.  27.  acceptat,  should  accept.  28.  en 
outre,  heddes.  29.  fait  beaucoup  d'honneur  a  son  esprit,  does  much 
honor  to  her  mind.    30.  il  en  fait  plus  encore,  it  does  still  more. 


5,  Le  Pot  de  Miel  {The  Jar  of  Honey). 

1.  Va  vite  me  chercher,  go  quickly  and  bring  me.  2.  un  citron,  a 
lemon.  3.  garde -manger,  pantry.  4.  parcourut  des  yeux,  site 
looked  all  around,  from  parcourir,  to  run  over,  to  wander  over. 
5.  friandise,  dainty.  6.  dont  elle  pflt,  with  which  she  might. 
7.  aper^ut,  perceived.  8.  pianche,  shelf.  9.  elle  sayait,  she  knew. 
10.  se  hissa,  raised  Iter  self  up.  11.  pour  atteindre,  to  reach.  12.  y 
plonger,  to  dip  in  it.  13.  le  bout  du  doigt,  the  tip  of  her  finger. 
14.  pincer,  nipped.  15.  poussa  un  cri,  uttered  a  cry.  16.  retira 
yivement,  withdrew  quickly.  17.  une  grosse  ecrevisso,  a  large  crab. 
18.  saisie,  seized.  19.  pinces,  claws.  20.  laclier  prise,  release  its 
hold.  21.  en  effet,  indeed.  22.  auparavant,  before.  23.  vide,  empty. 
34.  circonstance,  a  circumstance.  25.  au  cri  de  sa  flllo,  at  the  cry  of 
her  daughter.  26.  accourut,  ran.  27.  degagea,  freed.  28.  le  doigt 
meurtri,  the  bruised  finger.  29.  te  soit  un  ayertissement,  be  a  lesson 
to  thee.  30.  des  suites  bien  plus  funestes  encore,  still  far  moi'e  fatal 
consequences.  31.  gens,  people.  32.  defense,  spent.  33.  detrnit, 
destroyed.  34.  en  SB  liyrant  a  ce  mauvais  penchant,  by  yielding  to 
this  had  habit. 


6,  Le  Navet  {The  Turnip), 

1.  journalier,  day-laborer.  2.  tire  de,  taken  out  of.  3.  potager, 
kitchen-garden.  4.  grosseur,  size.  5.  fnisait,  was.  6.  chatean, 
castle.  7.  en  faire  liommage,  present  it.  8.  a  M,  le  comte,  to  the  count. 
9.  que  I'on  soigne,  that  people  should  attend.  The  sentence  is 
rendered  in  English  :  he  likes  very  much  to  have  the  fields  and  gardens 


NOTES  ON  mSTORIETTES,  143 

loeU  attended  to.  10.  le  seigneur,  thehrd.  11.  loua,  pramd.  12.  de, 
far.  13.  feruiier,  farmer.  14.  arare,  miserly.  15.  entendit  parler 
de,  heard.  16.  ce  qui  s'etait  passe,  wltat  had  Jiappened.  17.  Teau, 
calf.  18.  k  I'iustant  menie,  this  vei^  instant.  19.  aussitot,  inime 
diately.  20.  am  con,  round  th£  neck.  21.  et  pria,  «7wf  6<?^^d<i.  22.  le 
ni(»bile  secret,  tJie  secret  motive.  23.  cependant,  Jwwevei'.  24.  me- 
tayer, farmer.  25.  de  supplier,  to  supplicate.  26.  pnisque,  *2/Jc«. 
27.  cadean,  present.  28.  envers  moi,  towards  me.  29.  aussi,  also, 
likewise.  30.  cofite,  c<?s<.  31.  autant  que,  as  much  a«.  32.  interdit 
et  constern^,  asionislied  and  dismayed. 


7.  La  Probity  RecotnpensSe  {Honesty  Rewarded), 
1.  campagne,  country-place.  2.  yiyait,  lived,  from  \ivre,  to  live. 
3.  nat^uere,  not  long  ago.  4.  bucheron,  wood-cutter.  5.  k  six  ans,  at 
the  age  of  six  years.  6.  appris,  learned,  from  apprendre,  to  learn. 
7.  faisait,  2cas.  8.  devait  frapper,  was  to  stnke.  9.  detruire,  to  des- 
troy. 10.  viiit  k  mourlr,  died.  11.  succombait,  died.  12.  atteint 
d'une  pleuresie,  from  an  attack  of  pleurisy.  13.  devenir,  become  of. 
14.  ^SLn^  sL\^i^m,  without  protection.  15.  j^arder  les  besliaux,  A;^^?  </i^ 
catt^.  16.  elle  dut  niendier,  she  had  to  beg.  17.  on  ne  sanrait,  one 
cannot.  18.  privat'ons,  privations.  19.  endurer,  to  endure.  20.  le 
manque  d'abri,  a  want  of  shelter.  21.  des  paroles  dnres  et  brutales, 
Imrsh  and  brutal  words.  22.  au  milieu,  in  the  midst.  23.  n'oublia 
jamais,  never  forgot.  24.  s'ecoulereut  ainsi,  were  spent  thus.  25.  au 
bord  d'un  fosse,  on  the  edge  of  a  ditch.  26.  qu'elle  eut  soin  de  ra- 
masser,  which  sTie  took  care  to  pick  up.  27.  Tintention  bleu  arret^e, 
with  a  firm  purpose.  28.  rendre,  to  give  hack.  29.  tandis  qu'elle, 
while  she.  30.  emploierait,  should  employ.  31.  pour  en  d^couvrir  le 
niaitre,  to  find  its  otcner.  32.  roulier,  wagoner.  33.  Toiturier, 
driver.  34.  et  reconnut,  and  ascertainM.  35.  qu'il  appartenait, 
that  it  belonged.  36.  entre  autres  papiers,  among  otiier  papers. 
37.  en  billets  de  banque,  in  bank-notes.  38.  le  bien  d'autrui,  the 
property  of  others.  39.  de  sonarer  k,  to  think  of.  40.  arriv^e,  hamrvg 
arrived.    41.    se  rendit,  went,  from  se  rendre,  to  go,  to  betake  one's 


144  MOTES  ON  HI8T0RIETTES. 

self.  42.  celui-ci,  the  latter.  43.  celui,  the  one.  44.  la  veille,  the 
day  before.  45.  merite,  deserves.  46.  vous  me  devez,  you  owe  me. 
47.  voici  votre  quittance,  here  is  your  receipt.  48.  preiiez,  take. 
49.  qu'ils  vous  servent,  may  they  Juilp  you.  50.  et  vous,  reprit-il, 
and  as  for  you,  he  resumed.  51.  vous  me  permettrez,  you  will  allow 
me.  52.  vous  a  ravis,  has  taken  away  from  you.  53,  qui  auriiil; 
votre  age,  who  would  be  of  your  age.  54.  devenez  ma  fllle  d'adop- 
tion,  become  my  daughter  by  adoption.  55.  bfcuissez,  bless.  56.  qui 
a  su,  who  knew  Iww.    57.  aussi  probes,  so  honest. 


8.  L'Ogre  {TJte  Ogre). 
\.  S'^taient  ^gares,  had  lost  their  way.  2.  an  fond,  in  the  depths. 
*^  auberge  isolee,  isolated  inn.  4.  vers  minuit,  towards  midnight. 
o.  ^ntendlrent  parler,  lieard  speaking.  6.  voisine  de  celle,  next  to 
thai.  7.  appliquerent  I'oreille,  applied  the  ear.  8.  niuraille,  wall. 
9.  pour  ecouter,  to  listen.  10.  soin,  care.  11.  d'ecurer  le  chaudron, 
to  sc^ar  the  kettle.  12.  demain  de  boii  matin,  early  in  the  morning. 
Id.  conpe.r  la,  gorge^  cut  iJietJiroat.  14.  citadins,  aYs.  15.  faillirent 
mourir,  almost  died  of  fright.  16.  en  entendant,  when  they  heard. 
17.  ils  se  dirent,  they  said  to  one  another.  18.  tout  bas,  in  a  low 
voice.  19.  assurement,  surely.  20.  ils  s'approcherent,  they  drew 
near.  21.  sauterent  dans,  leaped  into.  22.  pour  se  j  auver,  to  make 
their  escape.  23.  ils  se  glisserent,  they  slipped.  24.  trou  aux  pores, 
pig-sty.  25.  impossible  a  decrire,  impossible  to  describe.  26.  aux 
premieres  lueurs  du  matin,  at  the  first  glimmer  of  morning.  27.  se 
mlt  a  aiguiser,  began  to  sharpen.  28.  allons,  come  now.  29.  sortez 
de  la,  come  out.  30.  pousserent,  uttered.  31.  supplierent  a  deux 
genoux,  begged  on  both  knees.  32.  leur  oter  la  vie,  take  their  lives. 
33.  fort  etonne,  very  much  astonished.  34.  etable  a  pores,  pig-sty. 
35.  s'ils  le  prenaient  pour,  if  tJiey  took  him  for.  36.  aubergiste, 
innkseper.  37.  les  petits  insenses,  the  little  fools.  38.  pensais,  toas 
thinking.  39.  je  voulais  parler,  /  loas  speaking.  40.  cochons  de 
lait,  sucking  pigs.  41.  pjir  badinage,  jokingly.  42.  ce  qui  arrive, 
which  happem,    43.  on  comprend  mal,  one  misunderstands.    44.  nous 


NOTES  ON  HISTOUIErTES.  145 

siigg^rent  de  faiiix  sou|)^ons,  awaken  false  suspicions  in  its.  45,  ou 
86  cree,  one  imagines.  46.  craintes  chiineriqiies^  ehimerical  fears. 
47.  etl'on  s'at<ire  sou  vent  des  chagrinBy  and  one  often  brings  upon 
(me*8  self  griefs. 

9,  La  Mendinnte  {The  Beggar), 

1.  Temps  de  famine,  time  of  famine.  2.  saison  d'hiver,  winter 
season.  3.  \vLitQ\va\\^^  unknown.  4.  de  porte  en  ^rte^  from  door  to 
door.  5.  demander  I'aunione,  ask  alms.  6.  propre,  neat.  7.  ra- 
pi^c^s,  mended.  8.  en  divers  endroits,  inmany places.  9.  le  vent 
soufflait,  tJie  wind  icas  blowing.  10.  serr6,  tied.  11.  a  decouvert. 
uncovered.  13.  tenalt,  teas  holding.  13.  droite,  right.  14  gauche, 
left.  15.  la  pliipart,  most.  16.  on  lie  liii  donnait  qu'une,  they  gam 
her  only.  17.  encore,  and.  18.  la  liii  passalt-on,  they  handed  it  to 
her.  19.  renvoyerent,  sent  away.  20.  villageois,  villager.  21.  I'un 
des  moins  aises,  one  of  tJielea^t  wealthy.  22.  la  flt  entrer  dans,  made 
Tier  enter.  23.  oil  regnait  line  douce  clialeur,  in  which  it  felt  comfortably 
warm.  24.  ciiire,  A^^>aA:^.  "Zo.l^XQnA^nidAn.ths  next  day.  26.  venue, 
hxid  come.  27.  invites  a  souper,  inmted  to  supper.  28.  Iiabitait, 
dwelt  in.  29.  lis  ne  s'attendaient  guere,  tMy  little  expected.  30.  su- 
jet  de,  cause  for.  31.  ils  y  virent,  tliey  saw.  32.  charg^e  de  mets 
d^Ucat^y  loaded  with  dainty  dishes.  33.  coiiverte,  covered.  34.  soit, 
either.  35.  pain  moisi,  mouldy  bread.  36.  soit,  or.  37.  une  poignee 
de  son,  a  handful  of  bran.  38.  rien  du  tout,  nothing  at  all. 
39.  niendiiinte  d^guis^e,  disguised  beggar.  40.  temps  de  detresse, 
time  of  distress.  41.  tant  de  peine,  so  much  trouble.  42.  de  quoi 
vivre,  ^  meana  of  subsistance.  43.  k  I'epreiive,  to  the  test.  44.  les 
deux  braves  gens  que  voici,  these  two  worthy  people.  45.  m'ont  permis, 
allowed  m£.  46.  nie  r^chaufler,  to  warm  myself.  47.  noiirrie,/^c?. 
48.  e'est  poiirqu(»i,  tJiat  is  the  reason  why.  49.  je  leur  ferai  iine 
^n^iouy  Iwillgica  (hem  a  pension.  50.  quant  a  vous  autres,  as  to 
you.  51.  que  ce  soit  pour  Yoa«!.  letitbeto^ou,  52.  qu'il  vous  sera 
fait,  that  you  wilZ  be  treated.  53.  selo ',  according  as.  54.  h,  votre 
procliaiii,  to  your  neighbor. 


146  NOTES  ON  HISTORIETTES. 

10,  La  Cigale  et  la  Fourmi  {The  GrassTiopper  and  the  An(). 

1.  Depourvue,  destitute.  2.  bise,  north  wind;  qnand  la  bise  fiit 
yenue,  when  cold  weather  had  set  in.  3.  iiiouche,  fly.  4.  yermisseau^ 
little  griib.  5.  elle  alia  crier  famine,  sTie  went  to  cry  famine,  that  is  : 
she  went  to  complain  of  her  poverty.  6.  je  yous  pairai  (payerai),  / 
shall  pay  you,  7.  avant  I'aout,  before  August,  before  harvest.  8.  foi 
d'animal,  on  the  faith  of  an  animal,  that  is  :  upon  the  honor  of  a 
gentleman.  9.  pretense,  lender.  10.  son  moindre  defant,  her  least 
fault.  11.  emprunteuse;  borrower.  12.  nuit  et  jour,  a  tout  yenant, 
day  and  night,  to  all  who  came  13.  ne  yous  deplaise,  by  your  leave. 
14  i'en  suis  fort  aise,  /  am  very  glad  of  it. 


PART    FOURTH. 


THE    PARTS    OF    SPEECH. 


In  French  as  in  English  there  are  ten  different  kinds  of  words, 
which  are  called  Parts  of  Speech  ;  they  are : 

1.  The  Noun,  6.  The  Participle, 

2.  The  Article,  7.  The  Adverb, 

3.  The  Adjective,  8.  The  Preposition, 

4.  The  Pronoun,  9.  The  Coiyunction, 

5.  The  Verb,  10.  The  Interjection. 

Definition  of  tlw  PaHs  of  Speech, 

1.  A  Noun  is  the  name  of  a  person,  place,  or  thing  ;  as,  Wasldng- 
ion,  Parit,  city. 

2.  An  Article  is  a  word  placed  before  a  noun  to  limit  its  meaning  ; 
as,  the  tree,  a  tree. 

3.  An  Adjective  is  a  word  added  to  a  noun,  to  describe  or  limit  it; 
as,  a  large  tree,  which  tree  ?  that  tree. 

4.  A  Pronoun  is  a  word  that  is  used  in  place  of  a  noun  ;  as,  /have 
your  book  ;  you  have  mine. 

5.  A  Verb  is  a  word  that  expresses  action  or  being  ;  as,  to  write, 
to  live. 

6.  A  Participle  is  a  part  of  the  verb  which  is  also  used  as  an  adjec- 
tive ;  as,  fields  covered  with  snow,  glittering  in  the  sun. 

Rem.  The  participlea  are  given  with  the  verb. 

7.  An  Adverb  is  a  word  that  expresses  manner,  time,  place,  etc  : 
as,  he  writes  weU  ;  I  see  him  often  ;  he  is  here. 

8.  A  Preposition  is  a  word  used  to  express  some  relation  of  differ- 
ent things  or  thouglits  to  each  other  ;  as,  the  book  lies  before  me  on> 
the  table. 

9.  A  Conjunction  is  a  word  used  to  connect  words  or  sentences  ;  as. 
you  and  he  are  happy,  because  you  are  good. 

10.  An  Interjection  is  a  word  that  denotes  a  sudden  emotion  of  the 
mind  ;  as,  ah  /  ala^f 


148 


THE  NOUN. 


J,  The  Noun. 


(1.)  Gender. 

Masculine. 

an  homme,  a  man ;  one 

un  boeuf,  an  ox  ;  une 

un  chat,  a  cat ;  une 

un  oiseau,  a  bird  ;  une 

un  poulet,  a  chicken ;  ime 

un  insecte,  an  insect ;  une 

un  village,  a  village ;  une 

un  jar  din,  a  garden  ;  une 

un  arbre,  a  tree ;  une 

un  miroir,  a  looking-glass  ;  une 

im  fauteuil,  an  arm-chair ;  ime 

un  canape,  or  sofa,  a  sofa ;  une 


Feminine, 
femme,  a  woman, 
vache,  a  cow. 
souris,  a  mouse, 
oie,  a  goose, 
poule,  a  hen. 
mouche,  a  fly. 

a  city. 
s 
feuille,  a  leaf. 
pendule,  a  time-piece, 
chaise,  a  chair. 
commode,  a  chest  of  drawers 


(2.) 
Singular. 
un  homme,  one  man ; 
une  femme,  one  woman 
un  arbre,  one  tree  ; 
une  feuille,  one  leaf ; 


Number. 

Plural. 
des  hommes,  men. 
des  femmes,  women. 
des  arbres,  trees. 
des  feuilles,  leaves. 


un  bas,  a  stocking  ; 
un  bras,  an  arm  ; 
un  tapis,  a  carpet ; 
une  croix,  a  cross  ; 


des  bas,  stockings. 
des  bras,  arms. 
des  tapis,  carpets. 
des  croix,  crosses. 


un  chapeau,  a  hat ; 
un  couteau,  a  knife  ; 
un  gateau,  a  cake  ; 
un  feu,  a  fire  ; 
un  jeu,  a  game  ; 


des  chapeaux,  hats. 
des  couteaux,  knives. 
des  gateaux,  cakes. 
des  feux,  fires. 
des  jeux,  games. 


un  cheval,  a  horse  ; 
un  animal,  an  animal ; 
v:n  general,  a  general ; 


des  chevaux,  horses, 
des  animaux,  animals. 
des  generaux,  generals. 


ARTICLE- ADJECTIVE.  I49 

Singular.  Plural. 

un  cloUj  a  iiuil ;  des  clous,  luiila. 

un  chou,  a  cabbage  ;  des  choux,  cabbages. 

un  bijou,  a  jewel ;  des  byoux,  jewels. 


JI,  TJie  Article. 

FORMS  OF  THE  ARTICLE  BEFORE  NOUNS. 

(1.)  Before  a  Masculine  Noun. 

Singular.  Plural. 

le  pere,  the  father  ;  les  peres,  the  fathers, 

du  pere,  of  the  father  ;  du  peres,  of  the  fathers, 

au  pere,  to  the  father ;  aux  peres,  to  the  fathers. 

(2.)  Before  a  Feminine  Noun. 

la  mere,  the  mother  ;  les  meres,  the  mothers, 

de  la  mere,  of  the  mother  ;  des  meres,  of  the  mothers. 

a  la  mere,  to  the  mother  ;  aux  meres,  to  the  mothers. 

(3.)  Before  a  Vowel. 
I'enfant,  the  child  ;  les  enfants,  the  children. 

de  I'enfant,  of  the  child  ;  des  enfants,  of  the  children. 

a  I'enfant,  to  the  child  ;  aux  enfants,  to  the  children. 

(4.)  Partitive  Tense. 

du  pain,  bread ;  de  la  viande,  meat. 

de  bon  pain,  good  bread  ;  de  bonne  viande,  good  meat, 

pas  de  pain,  no  bread  ;  pas  de  viande,  no  meat, 

des  gateaux,  cakes  ;  de  I'eau,  water. 

de  bons  gateaux,  good  cakes  ;         pas  d'eau,  no  water. 


III.  The  Adjective^ 

1.    QUALIFYING   ADJECTIVES. 

(1.)  Gender. — Singular. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

un  petit  gar9on,  a  little  boy  ;  une  petite  fille,  a  little  girl, 

un  grand  jardiii,  a  large  garden  ;     une  grande  maison,  a  large  housq 
de  mauvais  papier,  bad  paper ; 


150 


THE  ADJECTIVE. 


Masculine.  Feminine. 

un  jeune  homme,  a  young  man  ;    une  jeune  femme,  a  young  woman, 
un  enfant  malade,  a  sick  cliild  ;      une  fille  malade,  a  sick  girl. 


de  bon  pain,  good  bread  ; 
un  tel  homme,  such  a  man 


de  bonne  viande,  good  meat. 
une  telle  femme,  such  a  woman. 


un  garQon  attentif,  an  attentive    une  fille  attentive,  an    attentive 

boy  ;  girl, 

un  chapeau  neuf,  a  new  hat ;  une  robe  neuve,  a  new  dress. 


un  pere  courageux,  a  courageous 

father ; 
un  frere  studieux,  a    studious 

brother ; 


une  mere  courageuse,  a  courage- 
ous woman. 

une  soeur  studieuse,  a  studious  sis- 
ter. 


un  beau  jour,  a  fine  day  ; 

un  bel  arbre,  a  fine  tree  ; 

un  nouveau  cheval,  a  new  horse; 

un  nouvel  eleve,  a  new  scholar  ; 

un  vieux  soldat,  an  old  soldier  ; 

un  vieil  homme,  an  old  man  ; 


une  belle  maison,  a  handsome 
house. 

une  nouvelle  voiture,  a  new  car- 
riage. 

une  vieille  femme,  an  old  wo- 
man. 


(3.) 


Plural. 


les  petits  gar9ons,  the  little  boys  ;  les  petites  filles,  the  little  girls, 
les  mauvais  crayons,  the  bad  pen-  les   mauvaises    plumes,   the    bad 

cils  ;  pens. 

les  gargons  attentifs,  the  attentive  les  filles  attentives,  the  attentive 

boys ;  girls. 

les  hommes  heureux,  the  happy  les  femmes  heureuses,  the  happy 

men  ;  women, 

les  beaux  arbres,  the  fine  trees  ;     les  belles  maisons,  the  fine  houses, 
les  nouveaux  dessins,  the  new  pat-  les    nouvelles    etoflfes,    the    new 

terns ;  goods. 


LIMITING  ADJECTIVES.-'NUMERALS. 


151 


2.   LIMITING  ADJECTIVES. 


(1.) 


Posae^ve  Adjectives. 


Singular. 

Plural 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

For  both. 

mon, 

ma, 

mea, 

my. 

ton, 

ta, 

tas, 

thy. 

son, 

sa, 

■es, 

his,  her,  its. 

notre, 

notre, 

nofs 

our. 

votre, 

votre, 

V08, 

your. 

leur, 

leur, 

leurs, 

their. 

(3.)  Demonstrative  Adjective. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masculine.         Feminine.  For  both. 

ce,  cet,        cette,  this,  that,  ces,  these,  those. 


ce  gar9on,  this  boy,  that 

boy ;         ces  gar9ons,  these  boys,  those  b 

ce  gar9on-ci,  this 

boy  ; 

ces  gar9ons-ci,  these  boys. 

ce  gar9on-la,  that 

boy  ; 

ces  gar9ons-la,  those  boys. 

(3.) 

Numeral  Adjectives. 

Cardinal. 

Ordinal. 

1.  TJn^fem.  ime. 

1st.    Premier, /em.  premiere. 

2.  Deux. 

2d.    Deuxieme,  oj'  Second-e. 

3.  Trois. 

8d.    Troisieme. 

4.  Quatre. 

4th.  Quatrieme. 

5.  Cinq. 

5th.  Cinquieme. 

6.  Six. 

6th.  Sixieme. 

7.  Sept. 

7th.  Septieme. 

8.  Huit. 

8th.  Huitieme. 

9.  Neu£ 

9th.  Neuvieme. 

10.  Dix. 

10th.  Dixieme. 

11.  Onze. 

11th.  Onzieme. 

12.  Douze. 

12th.  Douzieme. 

13.  Treize. 

13th.  Treizieme. 

14.  Quatorze. 

14th.  Quatorzidme. 

15.  Quinze. 

15th.  Quinzieme. 

15 

2 

WUMEBALS. 

16. 

Seize. 

16tli. 

Seizieme. 

17. 

Dix-sept. 

17tli. 

Dix-septieme. 

18. 

Dix-huit. 

18tli. 

Dix-huitieme. 

19. 

Dix-neuf. 

19tli. 

Dix-neuvieme. 

20. 

Vingt. 

20th. 

Vingtieme. 

21. 

Vingt  et  un. 

21st. 

Vingt  et  uniemeu 

22. 

Vingt-deux. 

22d. 

Vingt-deuxieme. 

23. 

Vingt-trois. 

23d. 

Vingt-troisieme. 

24 

Vingt-qTiatre. 

24tli. 

Vingt-quatrieme. 

25. 

Vingt-cinq. 

25th. 

Vingt-cinquieme. 

26. 

Vingt-six. 

26th. 

Vingt-sixieme. 

27. 

Vingt-sept. 

27th. 

Vingt- septieme. 

28. 

Vingt-huit. 

28th. 

Vingt-huitieme. 

29. 

Vingt-neuf. 

29th. 

Vingt  neuvieme. 

30. 

Trente. 

30th. 

Trentilme. 

31. 

Trente  et  un. 

31st. 

Trente  et  unieme. 

32. 

Trente-deux. 

32d. 

Trente-deuxieme. 

33. 

Trente-trois. 

33d. 

Trente-troisieme. 

40. 

Quarante. 

40th. 

Quarantieme. 

41. 

Quarante  et  un. 

41st. 

Quarante  et  uniemeo 

42. 

Quarante-deux. 

42d. 

Quarante- deuxieme. 

43. 

Quarante-trois. 

43d. 

Quarante-troisieme. 

50. 

Oinquante. 

50th. 

Cinquantieme. 

51. 

Cinquante  et  un. 

61st. 

Cinquante  et  unieme. 

52. 

Oinquante-deux. 

52d. 

Cinquante-  deuxiemeo 

53. 

Cinquante-trois. 

53d. 

Cinquante- troisieme. 

60. 

Soixante. 

60th. 

Soixantieme. 

61. 

Soixante  et  un. 

61st. 

Soixante  et  unieme. 

62. 

Soixante-deux. 

62d. 

Soixante-d  euxi  eme. 

63. 

Soixante-trois. 

63d. 

Soixante-troisieme. 

70. 

Soixante-dix. 

70th. 

Soixante  dixieme. 

71. 

Soixante  et  onze. 

71st. 

Soixante  onzieme. 

72. 

Soixante-douze. 

72d. 

Soixante  -  douz  ieme. 

73. 

Soixante-treize. 

73d. 

Soixante-treizieme. 

74. 

Soi  xante-quatorze. 

74th. 

Soixante  quatorzieme. 

75. 

Soixante-quinze. 

75th. 

Soi  Xante-  quinziem  e. 

76. 

Soixante-seize. 

76th. 

Soixante- seizieme. 

77. 

Soixante-dix-sept. 

77th. 

Soixante  dix-septieme. 

78. 

Soixante-dix-huit. 

78th. 

Soixante-dix-huitieme. 

79. 

Soixante-dix-neuf. 

79th. 

Soixante-dix  neuvieme. 

80. 

Quatre-vingts. 

80th. 

Quatre-vingtieme. 

NUMERALS.— INDEFINITE  ADJECTIVES. 


15' 


81.  Quatxe-vingt-un.          ♦ 

81st. 

Quatre-vingt  unieme. 

82.  Quatre-vingt-deux. 

82d. 

Quatre-vingt- deuxieme. 

83.  Quatre-vingt-trois. 

83d. 

Quatre-vingt  troisieme. 

84.   Qiiatre-vingt-quatre. 

84th. 

Quatre-vingt  quatrieme. 

85.  Quatre-vingt-cinq. 

85th. 

Quatre-vingt  cinquieme. 

86.  Quatie-vingt-six. 

86th. 

Quatre-vingt  sixieme. 

87.  Quatre-vingt-sept. 

87th. 

Quatre-vingt  septieme. 

88,  Quatre-vingt-huit. 

8Sth. 

Quartre-vingt  huitieme. 

89.  Quatre-vingt-neut 

89th. 

Quartre-vingt-neuvic  roe. 

90.  Quatre  vingt-dix. 

90th. 

Quatre-vingt- dixieme. 

91.  Quatre-vingt  onze. 

91st. 

Quatre-vingt-  onzieme. 

92.  Quatre-ving^-douze. 

92d. 

Quatre-vingt-douzieme. 

93.  Quatre-vingt -treize. 

93d. 

Quatre-vingt-treizieme. 

94.  Quatre-vingt-quatorze. 

94th. 

Quatre  -  vingt  -  quator- 
zieme. 

95.  Quatre-vingt  quinze. 

95th. 

Quatre-vingt-quinzieme. 

96.  Quatre-vingt  seize. 

96th. 

Quatre-vingt-seizieme. 

97.  Quatre-vingt  dix-sept. 

97th. 

Quatre  -  vingt  -  dix  -  sep- 
tieme. 

98.  Quatre-vingt-dix-huit. 

98th. 

Quatre-  vingt  -  dix  -  hui- 
tieme. 

99.  Quatre-vingt-dix-neu£ 

99th. 

Quatre  -  vingt  -  dix  -  neu- 

100.  Cent. 

100th. 

Oentieme.              [vieme. 

101.  Cent-un. 

101st. 

Cent-unieme. 

200.  Deux  cents. 

200tli. 

Deux  centieme. 

210.  Deux  cent-dix 

210th. 

Deux  cent-dixieme. 

1,000.  Mille. 

1.000th. 

Millieme. 

1,001.  Mille-un. 

1,001st. 

Mille-unieme. 

2,000.  Deux  mille. 

2,000th. 

Deux  millieme. 

2,500.  Deux  mille-cinq  cents. 

2,500th. 

Deux   mille  -  cinq  -  cen- 

3,000.  Trois  mille. 

3,000th. 

Trois  millieme.      [tieme. 

1,000,000.  Un  million.                l,000,000tli. 

Millionieme. 

(4)                     Indefinite  Adjectives. 

Aucun,  aucune,  no,  not  any  ; 

Tout,  toute,  all ;  every  ;  whole. 

Nul,  nulle,  no ; 

Plusieurs,  several. 

Pas  un,  pas  une,  not  one ; 

Quel,  quelle,  what  ;  which. 

Autre,  other  ; 

Quelque 

!,  some  ;  quelques,  a  few. 

M4me,  same ; 

Quelconque,  any  ;  whatever. 

Chaque,  each ; 

6* 

Tel,  telle,  such. 

154 


THE  PRONOUN. 


IV,   The  ^Pronoun, 

1.  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. — CONJUNCTIVE. 


(1.) 

tu, 

thou ; 
he,  it  ; 

elle. 


she,  it ; 


Singular. 

me  (m'),  me  ; 
te  (f),       thee ; 
le  (1'),        him,  it  ; 
la  (1'),       her,  it  ; 


me  (m'),  to  me. 
te  (f),  to  thee 
lui,  to  him. 

lui,  to  her. 


Plural. 


nous,       we ; 

nous. 

us  ; 

nous,      to  us. 

vous,       you ; 

vous. 

you; 

vous,      to  you. 

ils,           they ; 

les, 

them  ; 

leur,       to  them. 

elles,       they ; 

les. 

them  ; 

leur,       to  them. 

en,  some  or  any 

of  it. 

of  them ; 

y,  to  it. 

to  them  : 

:          le  (1'),  it,  so. 

(2.)  Personal  Pronouns  used  as  Reflective  Pronouns. 

me,  myself,  to  myself  ;  nous,  ourselves,  to  ourselves. 

te,    thyself,  to  thyself  ;  vous,  yourselves,  to  yourselves. 

se,  himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves,  one's  self. 


(3.) 


Personal  Pronouns. — Disjunctive. 


moi,    I,  or  me  ; 

nous, 

we,  or  us. 

toi,      thou,  or  thee ; 

vous, 

you. 

lui,      he,  or  him  ; 

eux, 

they,  or  them. 

elle,    she,  or  her ; 

elles. 

they,  or  them. 

soi,  himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves,  one's  self. 


(4.)  Compound  Personal  Pronouns. 

moi-mSme,    myself;  nous-m^mes,  ourselves. 


toi-m^me,     thyself ; 
vous-m^me,  yourself ; 
lui-m^me,      himself ; 
elle-mSme,    herself ; 


vous-m^mes,  yourselves. 
eux-m^mss,  themselves. 
elles-mSmes,  themselves. 
soi-m^me,        one's  self. 


THE  PRONOUN. 


155 


2. 

POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 

Gingvla/r. 

Plural. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

le  mien, 

la  mienne, 

les  miens, 

les  miennes, 

mine. 

letien, 

la  tienne, 

les  tiens, 

les  tiennes, 

thine. 

le  sien, 

la  sienne, 

les  siens, 

les  siennes, 

his  ;  hers. 

le  ndtre, 

la  notre, 

les  notres, 

les  notres, 

ours. 

le  v&tre, 

la  votre, 

les  votres, 

les  votres, 

yours. 

J©  leur, 

la  leur, 

les  leurs. 

les  leurs, 

theirs. 

3.   DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

oe,  that,  it ;  ceci,  this  ;  cela,  that. 


Masculine.    Feminine. 
celui,         celle,        that,  the  one. 
celui-ci,      celled,    this  one. 
celui-la,     celle-la,    that  one. 


Plural. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

ceux. 

celles. 

those. 

ceux-ci, 

celles-ci, 

these. 

ceux-la. 

celles-la, 

those. 

4.    INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS, 
qui?  who?  whom? 
que  ?  what  ? 
quoi  ?  what  ? 

lequel  ?  laquelle  ?  which  ?  which  one  ? 
lesquels  ?  lesquelles  ?  which  ?  which  ones  1 


qui  est-ce  qui  ?  who  ? 
qu'est-ce  qui  ?  what? 
qui  est-ce  que  ?  whom  ? 
qu'est-ce  que  ?  what  ? 

6.   RELATIVE  PRONOUNS, 
qui,  who,  which,  that, 
que,  whom,  which,  that, 
a  qui,  to  whom. 

lequel,  laquelle,  lesquels,  lesquelles,  who,  whom,  which- 
dont,  of  whom,  of  which,  whose. 
quoi,  what, 
ou,  in  which. 


156 


TBE  VERB— AVOIR. 


6.    INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 


autruj,  others ; 

chacun,  every  one  ; 

I'un  I'autre,  the  one  the  other 

I'un  et  I'autre,  both  ; 

I'un  ou  I'autre,  either  ; 

ni  I'un  ni  I'autre,  neither ; 


on,  one,  some  one,  people,  they. 
personne  (ne),  nobody, 
quelqu'un,  somebody. 
quelques-uns,  some,  a  few. 
quiconque,  whoever. 
un  de,  one  of. 


aucun  (ne), 

nul  (ne), 

pas  uu  (ne),  not  one 


plusieurs,  several. 

tel,  telle,  such. 

tout,  all  ;  everything. 


F.  The  Verb. 

Conjugation  of  Avoir— to  have. 


INFINITIVE  MODE. 


Pbesbnt. 


Past. 


Avoir, 

to  have. 

Avoir  eu, 

to  have  had. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. 

Past. 

Compound. 

Ayant,          having. 

Eu,  m. ;  eue, 

,/.,    had.         Ayant  eu,       having  had. 

INDICATIVE  MODE. 

Pbksbnt. 

Past  Indefinite. 

J'ai, 

I  have. 

J'ai  eu, 

I  have  had. 

Tuae, 

thou  hast. 

Tu  as  eu, 

thou  hast  had. 

11  a, 

he  has. 

11  a  eu, 

he  has  had. 

Nous  avons, 

we  have. 

Nous  avons  eu, 

we  have  had. 

Vous  avez, 

you  have. 

Vous  avez  eu, 

you  have  had. 

lis  ont, 

they  have. 

lis  ont  eu, 

they  have  had. 

Imperfect. 

Pluperfect. 

J'avais, 

I  had. 

J'avais  eu, 

I  had  had. 

Tu  avals, 

thou  hadst. 

Tu  avais  eu, 

thou  hadst  had. 

11  avait, 

he  had. 

11  avait  eu, 

he  had  had. 

Nous  avions, 

we  had. 

Nous  avions  eu, 

we  had  had. 

Vous  aviez, 

you  had. 

Vons  aviez  en. 

you  had  had. 

lis  avaient, 

they  had. 

lis  avaient  eu. 

they  had  had. 

THE  VERB— AVOIR 


15? 


Pabt  Definite, 

Past  Anterior. 

J'eus, 

Ihad. 

J'eus  eu. 

I  had  had. 

Tu  eas, 

thou  hadst. 

Tu  eus  eu, 

thou  hadst  had. 

11  eut, 

he  had. 

11  eut  eu. 

he  had  had. 

Nous  eflmes. 

we  had. 

Nous  eflmes  eu, 

we  had  had. 

Vous  eates, 

yoit,  had. 

Vous  efites  eu, 

you  had  had. 

lis  eurent, 

they  had. 

Us  eurent  eu, 

they  had  had. 

Future. 

Future  Anterior. 

J'aurai, 

1  shall  have. 

J'aurai  eu, 

I  shall  have  had. 

Tu  auras, 

thou  will  have. 

Tu  auras  eu, 

thou  wilt  have  had. 

11  aura, 

he  will  have. 

11  aura  eu, 

he  will  have  fiad. 

Noue  aurons, 

we  shall  have. 

Nous  aurons  eti, 

we  shall  have  had. 

Vous  aurcz, 

you  will  have. 

Vous  aurez  eu, 

you  tvill  have  had. 

lis  auront. 

they  will  have. 

lis  auront  eu. 

they  will  have  had. 

CONDITIONAL  MODE. 


J'aurais, 
Tu  aural 8, 
II  aurait. 
Nous  aurions, 
Vous  auriez, 
lis  auraient, 


Pre.sent. 

I  should  have. 

thou  wouldst  have. 

he  would  have. 

we  should  have. 

you  woul'l  have. 


J'aurais  eu, 
Tu  aurais  eu, 
II  aurait  eu, 
Nous  aurions  eu 
Vous  iiuricz  eu, 


Past. 

/should  have  had. 

thou  wouldst  have  had. 

he  would  have  had. 

we  should  have  had. 

you  would  have  had. 


they  would  have.       lis  auraient  eu,      they  would  have  had. 


Aie, 


IMPERATIVE  MODE. 

Ayons, 
have  (thou).       Ayez, 


let  xishaoe. 
have  {you). 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 


Present. 


Que  j'aie. 
Que  tu  ales, 
Qu'il  ait, 
Que  nous  ayons, 
Que  vous  ayez, 
Qn'ils  aient. 


that  I  may  have. 

that  thou  mayst  have. 

that  he  may  have. 

thai  we  may  have. 

that  you  may  have. 

that  they  may  hare. 


Imperfect. 

Que  j'eusse,  that  71 

Que  tu  eusses,  that  thou 

Qu'il  eut,  that  he 

Que  nous  eussions,  that  we 

Que  vous  eusslez,  that  yon 

C^u'lls  eupsent,  that  they } 


Past. 
Que  j'aie  eu,  that  1  may  ^ 

Que  tu  aie?  eu,  that  thou  mayst  I 
Qu'il  ait  eu,  that  he  may  • 

Que  nous  ayons  eu,  that  we  may  - 
Que  vous  ayez  eu,  that  you  may  \ 
Qu'ilB  aient  eu,  Vtat  they  may  J 

Pluperfect. 
Que  j'eusFC  eu, 
Que  tu  eupses  eu, 
Qn'il  eflt  eu. 
Que  nous  enssions  eu. 
Que  vous  eussiez  eu, 
Qu'ilB  eussent  eu, 


that  71 

that  thou        I 

that  he    i^-t. 

thut  we    a.  > 

that  you  |      « 

that  theyj 


158 


TEE  VEEB—ETRE, 


Ktra, 


Pbksent. 


Conjugation  op  £^re—to  he, 
INFINITIVE  MODE. 


Past, 
to  be.  Avoir  4t6,  to  have  been. 


Pkksent. 
tftant,  beinff. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Past. 

]lt5,  been. 


Compound. 
Ayant  ^te,        having  been. 


Present. 


INDICATIVE  MODE. 

Past  Indemnite. 


Je  snis. 

lam 

J'ai  ete, 

J  have  been. 

Tues, 

thou  art. 

Tu  as  ete, 

thou  hast  been. 

11  est, 

he  is. 

.11  a  ete, 

he  has  been. 

Nous  sommes, 

toe  are. 

Nous  avone  ete. 

we  have  been. 

Vous  etes, 

you  are. 

Vous  avez  ete. 

you  have  been. 

lis  sont, 

they  are. 

lis  out  ete. 

they  have  been. 

Imperfect. 

Pluperfect. 

J'etais, 

I  was. 

J'avais  6te, 

J  had  been. 

Tu  etais, 

thou  wast. 

Tu  avals  ete, 

thou  hadst  been. 

11  ^tait, 

he  was. 

Ilavait  ete, 

he  had  been. 

Nous  etions, 

we  were. 

Nous  avions  6te, 

we  had  been. 

Vous  6tiez, 

you  were. 

Vous  aviez  ete. 

you  Jiad  been. 

lis  ^taient, 

they  were. 

lis  avaient  ete, 

they  had  been. 

Past  Definite. 

Past  Anterior. 

Jeftis. 

I  was. 

J'eus  6te, 

I  had  been. 

Tu  fus. 

thou  wast. 

Tu  eus  ete, 

thou  hadst  been. 

11  fut, 

he  was. 

11  eut  ete. 

he  had  been. 

Nous  fflmes, 

we  were. 

Nous  efimes  6te, 

we  had  been. 

Vous  mes, 

you  were. 

Vous  elites  ete. 

you  had  been. 

lis  furent, 

they  were. 

Up  eurent  ete, 

they  had  been. 

FUTURE. 

Future  Anterior. 

Je  serai. 

I  shall  be. 

J'aurai  ete, 

I  shall  have  been. 

Tu  seras. 

thou  wilt  be. 

Tu  auras  ei6, 

thou  wilt  have  been. 

11  sera, 

he  will  be. 

11  aura  ete, 

he  will  have  been. 

Nous  serons. 

we  shall  be. 

Nous  aurons  ete, 

we  shall  have  been. 

Vous  serez, 

you  will  be. 

Vous  aurez  6te, 

you  will  have  been. 

lis  seront. 

they  will  be. 

lis  auront  ete. 

they  will  have  been. 

CONDITIONAL  MODE. 


Present. 

Je  serais,  I  should  be. 

Tu  serais,  thou  wouldst  be. 

II  serait,  he  would  be. 

Nous  serious,  vje  should  be. 

Vous  seriez,  you  would  be. 

lis  seraient,  (hey  would  be. 


Past. 
J'aurais  et6,  1  should  have  been. 

Tu  aurais  6te,  thau  wouldst  have  been. 
11  aurait  ete,  h£  would  have  been. 

Nous  aurions  ete,  ux,  should  have  been. 
Vous  auriez  ete,  you  would  have  been. 
lis  auraient  et§,     they  would  have  been. 


THE  VEBB-PARLEB. 


159 


IMPERATIVE  MODE. 


Soyone, 

Musbe. 

Sols, 

he  (thou). 

Soyez, 

deiyau). 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 

Present. 

Past. 

Qae  je  sois, 

that  I  may  be. 

Quej'aie^t^, 

that  I  may) 

(^ue  tu  8oi8, 

that  thou  maysi  be. 

Que  tu  aies  ^t§,        thai  thou  mayst 

|o 

Qu'il  8oit, 

that  he  may  be. 

Qu'il  ait  6te, 

that  he  may 

^ 

Que  110U8  soyoiis. 

thai  we  may  be. 

Que  nous  ayons  ete, 

that  we  may 

■| 

Que  V0U8  soyez. 

that  you  may  be. 

Que  vous  ayez  ^te, 

that  you  may 

s 

QnMls  soient, 

that  they  may  be. 

Qu'Us  aient  ete, 

that  they  may 

. 

IMPKRPBCT, 

Plupbrpect. 

Qne  je  fasse, 

that  r 

Que  j'eusse  6t^, 

thatr 

Qae  tu  fu88e8, 

that  thou 

§ 

Que  tu  euBses  6te, 

that  thou 

J 

Qu'il  fflt, 

that  he 

;> 

Qiril  eflt  6te, 

that  he 

Que  nous  fussions, 

that  we 

- 

Que  nous  euesions  6te,       thxit  we  \ 

§  >• 

Que  vous  fussiez, 

that  you 

^ 

Que  vous  euseiez  ete, 

that  you 

•   a 

Qnlrf  fussent, 

that  they. 

Qu'ils  eussent  6t6, 

that  they. 

Conjugation  op  Parler—to  speak. 
INFINITIVE  MODE. 


Prxsknt. 
Parler,  to  speak. 


Past. 
Avoir  parlS,  to  have  spoken. 


Present. 
Parlani^  speaking. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Past. 

Parl6,  spoken. 

INDICATIVE  MODE. 


Compound. 
Ayant  parl6,  having  spoken. 


Present. 


Je  parle, 
Tu  parlefc, 
TI  parle. 
Nous  parlous, 
Vous  parle];, 
lis  parleni. 


T  speak. 

thou  speakesi. 

he  speaks. 

we  speak. 

you  speak. 

they  speak. 


Past  Ikdepinite. 


J'ai  parl£, 
Tu  as  parl6, 
II  a  parl^, 
Nons  avons  parl6, 
Vou?  avez  parl6, 
lis  ont  parle, 


1  have  spoken. 

thou  hast  spoken. 

fie  has  spoken. 

we  have  spoken. 

you  have  spoken. 

they  have  spoken. 


Imperitict. 


PHTPERITECT. 


Je  parlais, 
Tu  parlais, 
II  parlait, 
Nous  pnrlions, 
Vous  pnrlie*. 
lis  parlaient. 


I  was  speaking. 

thou  wast  speaking. 

he  was  speaking. 

we  were  speaking. 

you  were  speaking. 

they  were  speaking. 


J'avais  parl6, 
Tu  avals  parl6, 
II  avait  parle, 
Nous  avions  parl6, 
Vous  aviez  parle, 
lis  avaient  parl6, 


I  had  spoken. 

thou  hadst  spoken. 

he  had  spoken. 

we  had  spoken. 

you  had  spoken. 

they  had  spoken. 


160 


TEE  VERB—PARLER. 


Past  DtriNiTE. 

Past  AKTEiaoii. 

Je  parlai, 

I  spoke. 

J'eus  parl^, 

1  had  spoken. 

Tu  parlae, 

thou  spokes t. 

Tu  eus  parle, 

thou  hadst  spoken. 

11  parla, 

he  spoke. 

11  eut  parle, 

he  had  spoken. 

Nous  parlames, 

we  spoke. 

Nous  eumes  parle, 

we  had  spoken. 

Vous  parlates, 

you  spoke. 

Vous  eutes  parle, 

you  had  spoken. 

lis  parlerent, 

they  spoke. 

lis  eurent  parle, 

they  had  spoken. 

Future. 

Future  Anterior. 

Je  parlerai, 

I  shall  speak. 

J'aurai  parle, 

Ishall]  ^ 

Tu  parleras, 

thou  wilt  speak. 

Tu  auras  parle, 

thou  wilt    § 

11  parlera, 

he  will  speak. 

11  aura  parle, 

hewUll'^ 
we  shall  \i 

Nous  parlerons, 

we  shall  speak. 

Nous  aurons  parle, 

Vous  parlerez, 

you  wUl  speak. 

Vous  aurez  parle. 

you  will  1  ^ 

lis  parleront, 

they  will  sjnak. 

lis  auront  parle, 

they  will)  ^ 

CONDITIONAL  MODE. 

Present. 

Past. 

Je  parlerais, 

I  should  speak. 

J'aurais  parle, 

Ishould^  ^ 
thou  wouldst  1  1 

Tu  parlerais, 

thou  wouldst  speak. 

Tu  aurais  parle, 

11  parlerait, 

he  would  speak. 

11  aurait  parle, 

he  would  [  "" 

Nous  paileriont 

we  should  speak. 

Nous  aurions  parle. 

we  should    "§ 

Vous  parleriez, 

you  would  sjjeak. 

Vous  auriez  parle. 

you  would    ^ 

Us  parleraient, 

they  would  speak. 

lis  auralent  parle. 

they  would)  • 

IMPERATIVE  MODE. 

Parlous, 

let  us  speak. 

Parle, 

speak  {thou). 

Parlcz, 

speak  {you). 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 


Present. 
Que  je  parle,  that  I  may  speak. 

Que  tu  paries,  that  thou  mayst  speak. 
QuMl  parle,  that  he  may  speak. 

Que  nous  parlions.  that  ive  may  tpeak. 
Que  vous  parliez,  that  you  may  speak. 
Qu'ils  parlent,  that  they  may  speak. 


Imperfect. 


Que  je  parlasse. 
Que  tu  parlasses, 
QuMl  parlat, 
Que  nous  parlassione, 
Que  vous  parlassiez, 
Qu'ils  parlassent, 


that  I^  g 

that  thou  I  ^• 

that  he  \  ^ 

that  we\  ^ 

that  you  \  § 

that  they]  ^ 


Past. 
Que  j'aie  parle,  that  T may')  -^ 

Que  tu  alesparl^,      that  thou  mayst     % 


Qu'il  ait  parle, 


that  he  may 


Que  nous  ayons  parle,  that  we  may  [  "j 
Que  vous  ayez  parle,  that  you  may  ^ 
QuMls  aient  parle,        that  they  may)  ' 

Pluperfect. 
Que  j'eusse  parle,  that  1'] 

Que  tu  cusses  parle,  that  thou 
Qu'il  eut  parle, 

Que  nous  eussions  parle,  that  ive 
Que  vous  eussiez  parle,  that  you 
Qu'ils  eussent  parle,        that  they. 


that  he  <  s  ^ 


THE  VERB-FINIR. 


161 


CONJUGATION  OF  Fitiir—to  finish. 
INFINITIVE  MODE. 


Present. 

Pi 

LST. 

Pinir, 

tofiiUsh. 

Avoir  fini, 

to  have  finished. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. 

Past. 

Compound. 

Fin  J  ssant, /nwAing'.                      ¥\xi\  finished.               Ayant  tLni,  having  finished 

INDICATIVE  MODE. 

Present. 

Past  Indefinite. 

Je  finis, 

Tfinish. 

J'ai  fini. 

I  have  finished. 

Tu  finis. 

thoufinishest. 

Tu  as  fini, 

thou  hast  finished. 

11  fiuit. 

hefinishes. 

II  a  fini, 

he  has  finished. 

Noup  finipsons, 

,                         we  finish. 

Nous  avons  fini. 

we  have  finished. 

Vous  finissez, 

you  finish. 

Vons  avez  fini, 

you  have  finished. 

lis  finisscnt. 

they  finish. 

lis  out  fini. 

they  have  finished. 

iMPERrECT. 

Pluperfect. 

Je  finissais, 

I  was  finishing. 

J'avais  fini. 

1  had  finished. 

'l"u  finisBaip, 

thou  wast  finishing. 

Tu  avals  fini, 

thou  hadst  finished. 

11  flnissait, 

he  was  finishing. 

11  avait  fini, 

he  had  finished. 

Nous  finissione 

I,           we  were  finishing. 

Nous  avions  fini. 

we  had  finished. 

Vous  finissicz. 

you  were  finishing. 

Voue  aviez  fini. 

you  had  finished. 

lis  finissaient, 

they  were  finishing. 

lis  avai^nt  fini, 

they  had  finished 

Past  Definite. 

Past  Anterior. 

Je  finis?, 

/finished. 

J'eus  fini, 

I  had  finished. 

Tu  finis, 

thouflnishedst. 

Tu  ens  fini, 

thou  hadst  finished. 

II  fiiiit, 

he  finished. 

11  eut  fini. 

he  had  finished. 

Nous  finfmes, 

we  finished. 

Nous  efimes  fini. 

we  had  finished. 

Vous  fintfes. 

you  finished. 

Vous  eflte-ifini. 

you  had  finished. 

lis  finirent. 

they  finished. 

lis  eurent  fini. 

they  had  finished. 

Future. 

Future  Anterior. 

Je  finirai, 

I  shall  finish. 

J'aurai  fini, 

IshaU^ 

Tu  finiras, 

thou  wilt  finish. 

Tu  auras  fini. 

thou  wilt  1  Ss, 

11  flnira. 

he  7 ci'l  finish. 

11  aura  fini. 

hewiUlJ^ 
we  shall- fn 

Nous  finirons, 

we  shall  finish. 

Nous  aurons  fini, 

Nous  finirez, 

you  tcUl finish. 

Vous  aurez  fini, 

you  will  j  ^ 

lis  finiront, 

they  wui finish. 

lis  auront  fini. 

they  will) 

CONDITIONAL  MODE. 

Present. 

Past. 

Je  flnirais, 

I  should  finish. 

J"aurais  fini. 

1  should] 

Tu  finirais, 

tJiou  wo'ildst  finish. 

Tu  anrais  fini. 

thou  wouldst  1  v.  . 

11  finirait. 

lie  would  finish. 

11  nurait  fini. 

he  would  \  s-  ^ 
we  should  •  f  ^■ 

Nous  finirions, 

we  shmUd  finish. 

Nous  aurions  fini, 

Vous  finiriez. 

you  would  finish. 

Vous  anriez  fini, 

you  tiovld  j  ^ 

lis  finiraient, 

they  would  finish. 

lis  auraieiit  fini, 

they  would  ^ 

162 

THE  VEBB- 

-BECEVOIH. 

IMPERATIVE  MODE. 

Fin^issons, 

let  us  finish. 

F.inis, 

finish  (tJiou). 

Finissez, 

finish  (you). 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MODE. 

Pees 

lENT. 

Past. 

Que  jc  flnisse, 

thai  I  map] 

Que  j'aie  fini, 

that  I  may ")  > 

Que  tu  finisses,         that  thou  mayst  \ 

Que  tu  ales  fini,         that  thou  mayst  j  § 

Qu'il  flnisse, 

that  he  may  \ 

■>. 

Qu'il  ait  fini. 

that  he  may  >  '^ 
that  we  may    |. 

Que  nous  finissions, 

that  we  may  \ 

Que  nous  ayons  fini, 

Que  VOU8  fiuissiez, 

that  you  may 

Que  vous  ayez  fii.i, 

that  you  may    ^ 

Qu'il  finissent, 

that  they  may , 

Qu'ils  aient  fini, 

that  they  may  i  ^ 

Imperfect. 

Plupeefect. 

Que  je  finisse, 

that  I)  ^ 

Que  j'eusse  fini, 

that  71 

Que  tu  finisses, 

that  thoul  |- 

Que  tu  eus^Hes?  fini, 

that  thou  \^t. 

Qu'il  finit, 

that  he  !  g 
thai  toe    '^ 

Qu'il  efit  fini. 

that  he    ^^ 

Que  nous  flniesions, 

Que  nous  eussions  fini,       that  toe  f  f'^s! 

Que  vous  finissiez, 

that  you    |; 

Que  vous  eussiez  fini, 

,       that  you  \^% 

Qu'ils  finissent. 

that  they]  " 

Qu'ils  eussent  fini, 

that  they  i 

Conjugation  of  Recevoir — to  receive. 
INFINITIVE    MODE. 


Pbesent. 

Past. 

Recevoir, 

to  receive. 

Avoir  re9U, 

to  have  received. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. 

Past.                           Compound. 

Recevant,       receiving, 

Re9u,       received.       Ayant  refu, 
INDICATIVE  MODE. 

having  received. 

Present. 

Past  Indefinite. 

Je  re^ois, 

I  receive. 

J'ai  re9U. 

1  have  receivea. 

Tu  re9ois. 

thou  receivest. 

Tu  as  re9u, 

thou  hast  received. 

IlreQoit, 

he  receives. 

ll  a  re9U. 

he  has  received. 

Nous  recevons, 

tve  receive. 

Novis  avons  re9U, 

we  have  received. 

Vous  recevez. 

you  receive. 

Vous  avez  re9u, 

you  have  received. 

11^  resolvent. 

'^ey  receive. 

Us  ont  re9U, 

they  have  received. 

Imperfec: 

Plupbrfkct. 

Je  recevais,                      I 

wax  receiving. 

J'avais  re9ti. 

I  ^ad  received. 

Tu  recevais,              thou  ivast  nceixing. 

Tu  avais  Te9U, 

thou  haptM  received. 

11  recevait,                    Jie 

was  receiving. 

11  avait  re9n, 

he  h(pd  nceived. 

Nous  recevions.          we  were  receiving. 

Nous  avion s  re9U. 

we  had  received. 

Vous  receviez,            you 

were  receiving. 

.  Vousaviezre9U, 

you  had  received. 

Ub  recevaient,           they 

were  receiving. 

Usavaient  re9U, 

they  had  received. 

THE  VERB—RECEVOIR. 


1G3 


Past  Dkpinitb. 


Je  re^us, 
Tu  reyus, 
II  re9iii. 
Nous  re^iiinu-, 
Vou?  refutes, 
lU  re9uieDt, 


/  received. 

thou  receivedst. 

he  received. 

we  rectived. 

you  received. 

they  received. 


FCTURB. 


Je  recevrai, 
Tu  rccevras, 
II  recevra, 
Nous  recevronp, 
Vous  recevrez, 
lis  recevront. 


J  shall  receive, 
thou  wiU  receive, 
he  will  receive, 
we  shall  receive, 
you  will  receive, 
they  wilt  receive. 


Past  Antkrior. 

J'eus  re9U,  /  had  received. 

Tu  eus  re^u,  thou  hadst  received. 

II  eut  re9u,  he  had  received. 

Nous  efimei*  re9u,  we  had  received. 

Vous  efites  re9u,  you  had  received. 

lis  eurent  re9U,  tliey  had  received. 

Future  Anterior. 
J'aurai  re9u,  /  sJiaU  have  1 


Tu  auras  ie9u, 
II  aura  re9u, 
Nous  aurons  re9U, 
Vous  aurez  re9u. 
Us  auront  re9U, 


thou  wilt  have  \  -^ 
he  will  hare  1  ^ 
we  i<hall  have  {  S 
you  will  have    • 
they  will  have] 


CONDITIONAL    MODE. 


Present. 


Je  recevrais, 
Tu  recevrais. 
II  recevrait. 
Nous  recevrions, 
Vous  rocevriez, 
lis  recevraient, 


I  should  receive. 

thou  wouldst  receive. 

he  would  receive. 

loe  should  receive. 

you  would  receive. 


Past. 


J'aurais  re9u, 
Tu  anrais  ie9u, 
II  aurait  re9U, 
Noup  aurions  re9u, 
Vous  auriez  re9U, 


they  zvould  receive.       lis  auraieut  re9u, 


I sh&idd^  ^ 

thou  wovlds/    I 

he  woxdd  •.  ;| 

we  should  >  ^ 

you  ivould  j  I 

they  would)  • 


Regols, 


IMPERATIVE   MODE. 
receive  (thou). 


SUBJUNCTIVE 


Present. 

Qjiejere9oive, 

that! 

s 

a 

Que  tu  re90iveji, 

that  thou 

Qu'il  re9oive. 

that  he 

<«! 

Que  nous  recevionp, 

that  we 

1 

Que  vous  receviez, 

that  you 

Qu'ils  re9oivent. 

that  they. 

Ijn»ERFBCT 

Que  je  re9n88c. 

that  r 

2 

Que  tu  re9us8es. 

that  thou 

€ 

QuMl  re9flt, 

that  he 

> 

Que  nonp  re9ns9ion?. 

that  we 

i 

Que  voup  re9n9Piez, 

that  you 

« 

Qu'ils  re9US8eDt, 

that  they 

* 

Recevone, 

letusrei 

'xive. 

Recevez, 

receive  (you). 

Z  MODE. 

Past. 

Qnej'a1ere9n, 

that  1} 

Que  tu  aies  re9a, 

that  thou 

QueMl  ait  rc9U, 

that  he 
that  we  j 

Que  nous  ayons  re9u, 

^1 

Que  vons  ayez  re9n. 

that  you 

•    S 

Qu'ils  aient  re9U, 

that  they. 

Pluperfect, 

Qnej'enssc  re9n, 

that  1} 

^3 

If 

Que  tn  cusses  re9n, 

that  thou 

QnMl  eQt  re9U, 

that  he  •' 
that  7Pe 

Que  nous  enssions  re9U 

li 

Que  vous  enssjez  ro9n. 

that  you 

Qu'ils  eussent  re9U, 

that  they 

164 


THE  VEBB—VENDBE. 


Conjugation  of  Vendre—to  sell. 


INFINITIVE  MODE. 


Present. 
Vendre.  to  seU. 


Past. 
Avoir  vendu,    to  have  sold. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present. 
Vendant,  selling. 


past 
Vendu,  sold. 


COMPOUND. 

Ayant  vendu,  having  sold. 


INDICATIVE  MODE. 


Present. 

Past  Indefinite. 

Je  vends, 

IseU. 

J'ai  vendu. 

/  have  sold. 

Tu  vends, 

thou  sellest. 

Tu  as  vendu, 

thou  hast  sold. 

11  vend, 

he  Sflls. 

11  a  vendu. 

he  has  sold. 

Nous  vendons, 

we  sell. 

Nouif  avons  vendu. 

we  have  sold. 

Vous  vendez. 

you  sell. 

Vous  avez  vendn, 

you  have  sold. 

11  sf  vendent. 

they  sell. 

Hi?  ont  vendu, 

they  have  sold. 

Ihh-erfect. 

Pluperfect. 

Je  vendais, 

I  was  selling. 

J'avais  vendu. 

1  had  sold. 

Tu  vendais, 

thou  wast  selling. 

Tu  avais"  vendu, 

thou  hadst  sold. 

11  vendait, 

he  was  selling. 

11  avait  vendu. 

he  had  sold. 

Nous  veudions, 

we  were  sellinq. 

Nons  avion?  vendu, 

we  had  sold. 

Vous  vendiez, 

you  were  selling. 

Vous  aviez  vendu, 

you  had  sold. 

lis  vendaient, 

they  were  selling. 

lis  avaiont  vendu, 

they  had  sold. 

Past  Definite. 

Past  Anterior. 

Je  vendis, 

Isold. 

J'eus  vendu. 

I  had  sold. 

Tu  vendis, 

thou  soldest. 

Tn  ens  vendu. 

thou  hadst  sold. 

11  vendit, 

he  sold. 

11  eut  vendn. 

he  had  sold. 

Nous  vendimes 

,                         we  sold. 

Nons  eumes  vendu, 

we  had  sold. 

Vous  vendites. 

you  sold. 

Vous  efltes  vendu, 

you  had  sold. 

lis  vendirent, 

they  sold. 

lis  eurent  vendu, 

they  had  sold. 

Future. 

Future  Anterior. 

Je  vendrai, 

/  shall  sell. 

J'aurai  vendu, 

IshaU- 

Tu  vendras, 

thou  wilt  seU. 

Tu  auras  vendu, 

thou  wilt    ^ 

II  vendra. 

hewUlsell. 

II  aura  vendu. 

he  ^vill !  § 
Wf  fhall  j  g^ 

Nous  vendrons, 

,                   we  shaU  sell. 

Nous  aurons  vendu 

V^ous  vendrez, 

you  will  sell. 

Vous  auroz  vendu, 

you  will  1  ?^ 

Us  vendront, 

they  will  sell. 

lis  auront  vendu, 

they  Willi 

THE  VERB^PARTICIPLE-ADVERB. 


165 


CONDITIONAL   MODE. 


Pbbsbnt. 


Je  vendrais, 
Til  vendrais, 
II  vendrait, 
Nous  vendrions, 
Vous  vendriez, 
lis  veDdraient, 


1  should  sell. 

thou  woiUdst  sell. 

he  would  sell. 

we  should  sell. 

you  would  sell. 


Past. 
J'aurais  vcndu, 
Tu  aurais  vendu, 
II  aurait  vendu, 
Nous  auriouH  vendu, 
Voui*  auriez  vendu, 


they  would  sell.       lis  auraient  vendu, 


I  should  ] 

thou  tuouldxt  I  » 

he  would  !  « 

we  should  •  ^ 

you  would    «^ 

they  would  i 


V^endfl, 


IMPERATIVE  MODE. 

Vendons, 
tell  ifJiou)  Vendez, 


let  us  sell, 
sell  (you). 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MODE. 


Present. 
Que  je  vende,  that  1  may  sell. 

Que  tn  vendee,  that  thou  mayst  sell. 
Q n ' il  vende ,  that  he  may  sell. 

Que  none  vendione,  that  we  may  fell. 
Que  vous  vendiez,  that  you  may  sell. 
QuMl?  vendent,  that  they  may  sell. 


Past. 
Que  j'aie  vendu,  thatlmay' 

Que  tu  aies  vendu,    that  thou  mayst 
Qu'il  ait  VL-ndu,  that  he  may 

Que  nous  Myons  vendu,  that  we  may  • 
Que  vousayez  vendu,  that  you  may 
Qu'ilp  aieiit  vendu,      that  they  may 


I* 


Imperfect. 
Que  je  vendisse. 
Que  tu  vendisses, 
QuMl  vendft. 
Que  nouf  vendisBionf, 
Que  vous  vendissiez, 
QuMls  vendissent. 


that  n 
that  thou    |, 
that  lu  •'  "|. 
thai  ice  1  * 
that  you 
that  they] 


Pluperfect. 
Que  j'ewfee  vendu. 
Que  tu  eusees  vendu, 
Qu'il  eflt  vendn. 
Que  nous  eussions  vendu, 
Que  vous  euseiez  vendu, 
Qu'ils  eussent  vendu, 


It 


VI.  The  Participle, 

The  Participles  are  given  with  the  verbs. 


Ainsi,  thus ; 
alors,  then  ; 
aujourd'hui,  to-day  ; 
aussi,  also,  too  ; 


VII,  Tlie  Adverb, 

ensuito,  tlien,  afterwards ; 
hier,  yesterday : 
longtemps,  long,  a  long  time  ; 
maintenant,  now  ; 


166 


THE  AD  VERB— PREPOSITION. 


bien,  well ; 
bient6t,  soon ; 
comme,  as,  like ; 
comment,  how ; 
dedans,  within ; 
dehors,  outside ; 
deja,  already  ; 
demain,  to-morrow ; 
encore,  still  ;  yet ; 
ensemble,  together 


mai,  badly  ; 

partout,  everywhere ; 

quand,  when ; 

presque,  almost  ; 

si,  so; 

souvent,  often  ; 

surtout,  especially ; 

tantot,  by  and  by;  a  little  while  ag: 

tard,  late ; 

toujours,  always. 


Assez,  enough ; 
autant,  as  much  ;  as  many  ; 
beaucoup,  much,  many  ; 
combien,  how  much,  how  many 


moinjs,  less ; 

peu,  little  ;  a  few  ; 

plus,  more ; 

trop,  too  ;  too  much. 


Doucement,  softly,  gently ; 
heureusement,  fortunately; 


lentement,  slowly  : 
poliment,  politely. 


Tres,  very ; 
fort,  hard ;  very  ; 


bien,  well,  very ; 
assez,  enough ;  rather. 


VIII,  The  Preposition, 

Avant,  before ;  hors,  out ; 

contre,  against ;  jusque,  till,  until  ;  as  far 

depuis,  since  ;  parmi,  among  ; 

derriere,  behind ;  pendant,  during  ; 

devant,  before  ;  pres  de,  near  ; 

entre,  between  ;  sous,  under  ; 

environ,  about ;  sur,  on,  upon  ; 

excepte,  except ;  vis  a  vis,  opposite. 


THE  CONJUNCTION— INTERJECTION. 


167 


IX. 

Aussitdt  que,  as  soon  as ; 
avant  que,  before  ; 
car,  for  ; 

Dependant,  however ; 
et,  and  ; 
lorsque,  when 
maia,  but ; 


The  Co^ijunction, 

ni,  neither ;  nor  ; 
^  ou,  or  ; 
parce  que,  because 
pourquoi.  why  ; 
que,  that  ; 
quoique,  although  i 
81,  if ;  whether. 


Ah!  ah  I 

aKe!  oh  I 
helas  !  alas ! 
fi!  fy! 
oh!  ohi 


The  Interjection, 

bah  !  pshaw  I 
paix  I  silence  1 
chut  1  hist  I 
hola  !  hallo  I 
eh  bien !  well  tkor 


<^^U^i 


-.aJU 


^^ — 


fyQ^f 


VB  35683 


The  Most  Reliable  and  Widely-u^.. . 

Physiology  and  Hygiene. 

A    COMPLETE    COURSE, 

FULX.Y  COMPLYING  WITH  THE   StATK   LaWS  REQUIRING  INSTRUCTION    IN    PHYSIOLOGY 

AND  Hygiene,  with  Special  liEPERKNCB  to  the  Physiological  Effects 
OF  Stimulants  and  Narcotics. 

By  Joseph  C.  Hutchison,  M.D.,  LL.D., 

Eoz-P^enident  of  the  New  York  Patlvolotjical  Society  ;  Ex-Vice-I^esident  of  the  Neio 

York  Academy  of  Medicine  ;  Surgeon  to  the  Brooklyn  City  Hospital :  and 

late  i*residen,t  of  the  Medical  Society  of  the  State  of  New  York. 


FOR  ELEMENTARY  GRADES  AND  UNGRADED  SCHOOLS. 

FiEST  Lessons  in  Physiology.  Fully  illustrated.   160  pages, 

IGmo,  cloth. 

FOR  GRAMMAR  GRADES. 

The  Laws  of  Health.     Copiously  illustrated.     223  pages, 

iGiuo,  cloth. 

FOR  HIGH-SCHOOLS,  ACADEMIES,  AND  COLLEGES. 

Physiology  and  Hygiene.    With    numerous   accurate   and 

artistic  cuts  and  colored  plates.    330  pages,  12mo,  cloth. 

With  the  present  preat  number  of  text-books  on  Physiology  which  have  been 

{Hiblishi'd  for  the  smideniy  increased  demand,  and  many  of  them  b^'  authors  of 
iitle  or  BO  experimental  kiiowled^'H  of  their  subject,  we  believe  that  teachers  will 
see  the  pi'udeiice  and  wisdom  of  st'leciiug  the  works  of  Dr.  Hutchison,  who,  by  his 
hi^di  piof.'ssioiial  position  and  well-kuown  reputation  for  clear  and  thorough  writ- 
in;^.  is  prfi'iuincnUy  qualified  for  the  special  work  in  the  Complete  Course. 

FioiiL  Samuel  G.  Armor,  M.l>., 
lat*"  I'mft-ssor  In  Miehi);an  Univer- 
sit.\  :  ••  Many  of  the  popular  works  on 
l'liy>iol..;,'y  now  in  use  in  schools,  acad- 
tniies.  and  collcpres  do  not  reflect  the 
inf-seut  state  of  the  science,  and  some  of 
iliem  abound  in  absolute  eiroi-g.  The 
work  which  Dr.  Hulchison  has  eriven  to 
tilt'  public  is  free  from  these  objection- 
ahl.'  f.-atures.  1  give  it  my  hearty  com- 
nieiKiafioM." 


.'«>  om  Pri»f.  Bnrt  G.  Wilder,  M.T>., 
'\  «»rnell  L'liiversity,  Ithaca,  N.  Y.  : 

I  have  exainin»'d  somewhat  carefully 
Hutchison's  Physio|oj;y  and  Hvgii'ue, 
and  nun  recommend  it  as  an  accurate, 
inteiii^rjbie  and  well-illustrated  text- 
book for  schools. 


From  Boston  Journal  of  Chem- 
istry :  This  book  is  one  of  the  very  few 
sthool-Wooks  on  these  subjects  wliich 
can  be  unconditionally  recommended. 
The  "Physiology  and  Hygiene"  is  probably  used  in  more  first>claM  Schools  than 
any  other  book  on  a  like  sabject. 


It  is  accurate,  free  from  needless  tech- 
nicalities, and  judicious  in  the  practical 
advice  it  pives  on  Hyirienic  topics.  The 
illustrations  are  excellent,  and  the  book 
is  well  printed  and  bound. 

From  the  Itoston  Medical  and 
Siirg^ical  Journal:  *"  Le^islat'TS  are 
untiring  in  their  efforts  to  stay  the 
j)vogress  of  intemperance  by  various 
methods,  some  of  wliich  are  well  advised 
and  others  ill  advised,  but  the  more 
recent  proposal  of  educators  to  remedy 
the  evil  by  the  early  training  of  the 
child  jrives  promise  of  better  results. 
The  prevention  of  an  evil  by  correct 
education  in  early  life  is  a  more  encour- 
aging process  than  its  cure  by  any 
treatment,  either  mild  or  heroic,  in  later 
year.>-';  and  the  timely  appearance  of 
this  text-book  by  Dr.  Hutchison  is 
well  calculated  to  meet  the  demand  for 
such  elementary  instruction  as  it  c<  n- 
tains." 


Clark  &  Maynard,  Publishers, 

771    Broadway  and  67  &•  69  Ninth  Street,  New  York. 


